Pioneer Car Video System AVIC N5 User Manual

Operation Manual  
DVD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER  
AVIC-N5  
Notice to all users:  
This software requires that the navigation system is  
properly connected to your vehicles parking brake and  
depending on your vehicle, additional installation may  
be required. For more information, please contact your  
Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at  
(800) 421-1404.  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
3
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
other means. You shall not use the Software to  
operate a service bureau or for any other use  
involving the processing of data for other per-  
sons or entities.  
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-  
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-  
tary ownership rights in the Software. The  
Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-  
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-  
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any  
copyright notice or proprietary legend con-  
tained in or on the Software.  
You may transfer all of your license rights in  
the Software, the related documentation and a  
copy of this License Agreement to another  
party, provided that the party reads and agrees  
to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-  
cense Agreement.  
License Agreement  
PIONEER AVIC-N5 - for U.S.A.  
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN  
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER  
ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. (PIONEER).  
PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDI-  
TIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BE-  
FORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON  
THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THE  
SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER  
PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY  
THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFT-  
WARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY  
THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER( S) (SUPPLIERS),  
AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-  
ERED BY THE SUPPLIERSSEPARATE  
TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS  
AGREEMENT (Refer to page 13). IF YOU DO  
NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS,  
PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS  
(INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY  
WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS  
OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THE  
AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM  
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF  
THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE  
YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-  
MENT.  
2
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY  
The Software and related documentation are  
provided to you AS IS. PIONEER AND ITS LI-  
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2  
and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-  
lectively referred to as Pioneer) MAKES AND  
YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-  
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-  
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-  
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT  
ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-  
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT  
APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and  
may contain some nonconformities, defects or  
errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-  
ware will meet your needs or expectations,  
that operation of the Software will be error free  
or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities  
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer  
does not make any representations or warran-  
ties regarding the use or results of the use of  
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability  
or otherwise.  
1
GRANT OF LICENSE  
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non  
exclusive license to use the software installed  
on the Pioneer products (the Software) and  
the related documentation solely for your own  
personal use or for internal use by your busi-  
ness, only on such Pioneer products.  
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,  
port, modify or make derivative works of the  
Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose,  
publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market  
or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in  
any manner not expressly authorized by this  
agreement. You shall not derive or attempt to  
derive the source code or structure of all or  
any portion of the Software by reverse engi-  
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
3
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
regulations of the United States. If the Soft-  
ware has been rightfully obtained by you out-  
side of the United States, you agree that you  
will not re-export the Software nor any other  
technical data received from Pioneer, nor the  
direct product thereof, except as permitted by  
the laws and regulations of the United States  
and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-  
tion in which you obtained the Software.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-  
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-  
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL,  
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR  
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST  
INCOME, LOST SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPEN-  
DITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS  
IN CONNECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS  
OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULT-  
ING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE  
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS  
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD  
HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF  
SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES  
TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVI-  
DUALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING  
WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CON-  
TRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLI-  
GENCE, STRICT LIABILITY,  
MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS.  
IF PIONEERS WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS  
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON  
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE  
OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT  
PIONEERS LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED  
FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY  
YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-  
DUCT.  
5
TERMINATION  
This Agreement is effective until terminated.  
You may terminate it at any time by destroying  
the Software. The Agreement also will termi-  
nate if you do not comply with any terms or  
conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-  
mination, you agree to destroy the Software.  
6
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS  
If the Software is being acquired by or on be-  
half of the United States government or any  
other entity seeking or applying rights similar  
to those customarily claimed by the United  
States government, the Data is licensed with  
Limited Rights. Utilization of the Software is  
subject to the restrictions specified in the  
Rights in Technical Dataclause at DFARS  
252.227-7013, or the equivalent clause for non-  
defense agencies. Pioneer Electronics (USA)  
Inc., 2265 East 220th Street, Long Beach, CA  
90810.  
Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-  
itation of incidental or consequential da-  
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion  
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer  
and limitation of liability shall not be applic-  
able to the extent that they are prohibited by  
any applicable federal, state or local law which  
provides that such a disclaimer or limitation  
cannot be waived or preempted.  
7
MISCELLANEOUS  
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer  
and you regarding its subject matter. No  
change in this Agreement shall be effective  
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer  
retailers do not have the authority to change  
this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-  
erned by and construed in accordance with  
the internal laws of the State of California. If  
any provision of this Agreement is declared in-  
valid or unenforceable, the remaining provi-  
sions of this Agreement shall remain in full  
force and effect.  
4
EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES  
You agree and certify that neither the Software  
nor any other technical data received from  
Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be  
exported outside the United States except as  
authorized and as permitted by the laws and  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
operate a service bureau or for any other use  
involving the processing of data for other per-  
sons or entities.  
PIONEER AVIC-N5 - for Canada  
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN  
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER  
ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-  
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-  
tary ownership rights in the Software. The  
Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-  
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-  
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any  
copyright notice or proprietary legend con-  
tained in or on the Software.  
You may transfer all of your license rights in  
the Software, the related documentation and a  
copy of this License Agreement to another  
party, provided that the party reads and agrees  
to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-  
cense Agreement.  
(PIONEER). PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND  
CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CARE-  
FULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE IN-  
STALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY  
USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE  
PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE  
BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREE-  
MENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATA-  
BASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER  
(S) (SUPPLIERS), AND YOUR USE OF THE  
DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’  
SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED  
TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page 13). IF  
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE  
TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRO-  
DUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND  
ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5)  
DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO  
THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM  
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF  
THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE  
YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-  
MENT.  
2
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY  
The Software and related documentation are  
provided to you AS IS. PIONEER AND ITS LI-  
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2  
and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-  
lectively referred to as Pioneer) MAKES AND  
YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-  
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-  
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-  
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT  
ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-  
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT  
APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and  
may contain some nonconformities, defects or  
errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-  
ware will meet your needs or expectations,  
that operation of the Software will be error free  
or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities  
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer  
does not make any representations or warran-  
ties regarding the use or results of the use of  
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability  
or otherwise.  
1
GRANT OF LICENSE  
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non  
exclusive license to use the software installed  
on the Pioneer products (the Software) and  
the related documentation solely for your own  
personal use or for internal use by your busi-  
ness, only on such Pioneer products.  
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,  
port, modify or make derivative works of the  
Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose,  
publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market  
or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in  
any manner not expressly authorized by this  
agreement. You shall not derive, or attempt to  
derive, the source code or structure of all or  
any portion of the Software by reverse engi-  
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any  
other means. You shall not use the Software to  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
3
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
obtained by you outside of Canada, you agree  
that you will not re-export the Software nor any  
other technical data received from Pioneer,  
nor the direct product thereof, except as per-  
mitted by the laws and regulations of Canada  
and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-  
tion in which you obtained the Software.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-  
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-  
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL,  
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR  
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST  
SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, IN-  
VESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CON-  
NECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF  
ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTING  
FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE  
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS  
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD  
HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF  
SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES  
TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION IN THE AGGRE-  
GATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION  
BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WAR-  
RANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MIS-  
REPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS. IF  
PIONEERS WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS  
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON  
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE  
OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT  
PIONEERS LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED  
FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY  
YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-  
DUCT.  
5
TERMINATION  
This Agreement is effective until terminated.  
You may terminate it at any time by destroying  
the Software. The Agreement also will termi-  
nate if you do not comply with any terms or  
conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-  
mination, you agree to destroy the Software.  
6
MISCELLANEOUS  
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer  
and you regarding its subject matter. No  
change in this Agreement shall be effective  
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer  
retailers do not have the authority to change  
this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-  
erned by and construed in accordance with  
the internal laws of the Province of Ontario  
and the federal laws of Canada applicable  
therein. If any provision of this Agreement is  
declared invalid or unenforceable, the remain-  
ing provisions of this Agreement shall remain  
in full force and effect.  
Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-  
itation of incidental or consequential da-  
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion  
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer  
and limitation of liability shall not be applic-  
able to the extent that they are prohibited by  
any applicable federal, state or local law which  
provides that such a disclaimer or limitation  
cannot be waived or preempted.  
4
EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES  
You agree and certify that neither the Software  
nor any other technical data received from  
Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be  
exported outside Canada except as authorized  
and as permitted by the laws and regulations  
of Canada. If the Software has been rightfully  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
CHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AC-  
CURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A  
Terms and Conditions for the  
Tele Atlas Data  
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE AGREE-  
MENT) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND  
TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. (Tele  
Atlas). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE  
ATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS  
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRIT-  
TEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED  
BY TELE ATLAS OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS, EM-  
PLOYEES OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS  
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE  
NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH AD-  
VICE OR INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER  
OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDI-  
TION OF THE AGREEMENT.  
1
Grant of License.  
Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable, non-  
exclusive license to use the map data and  
business points of interest information (the  
POIs), (together, the Data) contained on  
these discs, solely for personal, non-commer-  
cial use and not to operate a service bureau or  
for any other use involving the processing of  
data of other persons or entities. You may  
make one (1) copy of the Data for archival or  
backup purposes only but you may not other-  
wise copy, reproduce, modify, make derivative  
works, derive the structure of or reverse engi-  
neer the Data. The Data contains confidential  
and proprietary information and materials,  
and may contain trade secrets, so you agree to  
hold the Data in confidence and in trust and  
not to disclose the Data or any portions in any  
form, including by renting, leasing, publish-  
ing, leasing, sublicensing or transferring the  
Data to any third party. You are prohibited  
from removing or obscuring any copyright, tra-  
demark notice or restrictive legend.  
4
Limitation of Liability.  
TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU  
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,  
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DA-  
MAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT,  
INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OF  
COVER, LOSS OF USE OR BUSINESS INTER-  
RUPTION OR THE LIKE, REGARDLESS OF  
WHETHER YOU WERE ADVISED OF THE POS-  
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITH-  
STANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY  
CONTAINED HEREIN, TELE ATLAS SHALL  
HAVE NO MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR  
ANY CAUSE (REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF  
ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS  
AGREEMENT.  
5
Termination.  
This Agreement will terminate immediately  
and automatically, without notice, if you  
breach any term of this Agreement. You agree  
that in the event of termination of the Agree-  
ment, you shall return the Data (including all  
documentation and all copies) to Tele Atlas  
and its suppliers.  
2
Ownership.  
The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its li-  
censors and they retain all ownership rights in  
the Data. You agree not to alter, remove, oblit-  
erate, or obscure any copyright notice or pro-  
prietary legend contained in or on the Data.  
3
Warranty Disclaimer.  
THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN AS ISAND  
WITH ALL FAULTS BASISAND TELE ATLAS  
AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM  
ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN-  
CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MER-  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
6
Indemnity.  
it is agreed that the Data is a trade secret and  
a proprietary commercial product and not sub-  
ject to disclosure.  
You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Tele  
Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers (includ-  
ing their respective licensors, suppliers, as-  
signees, subsidiaries, affiliated companies,  
and the respective officers, directors, employ-  
ees, shareholders, agents and representatives)  
free and harmless from and against any liabili-  
ty, loss, injury (including injuries resulting in  
death), demand, action, cost, expense, or  
claim of any kind or character, including but  
not limited to attorneys fees, arising out of or  
in connection with any use or possession by  
you of the Data.  
If you are an agency, department, or other en-  
tity of any State government, the United States  
Government or any other public entity or  
funded in whole or in part by the United States  
Government, then you hereby agree to protect  
the Data from public disclosure and to consid-  
er the Data exempt from any statute, law, regu-  
lation, or code, including any Sunshine Act,  
Public Records Act, Freedom of Information  
Act, or equivalent, which permits public ac-  
cess and/or reproduction or use of the Data.  
In the event that such exemption is challenged  
under any such laws, this Agreement shall be  
considered breached and any and all right to  
retain any copies or to use of the Data shall be  
terminated and considered immediately null  
and void. Any copies of the Data held by you  
shall immediately be destroyed. If any court of  
competent jurisdiction considers this clause  
void and unenforceable, in whole or in part,  
for any reason, this Agreement shall be con-  
sidered terminated and null and void, in its en-  
tirety, and any and all copies of the Data shall  
immediately be destroyed.  
7
U.S. Government Rights.  
If you are an agency, department, or other en-  
tity of the United States Government, or  
funded in whole or in part by the United States  
Government, then use, duplication, reproduc-  
tion, release, modification, disclosure or trans-  
fer of this commercial product and  
accompanying documentation, is restricted in  
accordance with the LIMITED or RESTRICTED  
rights as described in DFARS 252.227-7014(a)  
(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD commercial computer  
software definition), DFARS 227.7202-1 (DOD  
policy on commercial computer software),  
FAR 52.227-19 (JUN 1987) (commercial com-  
puter software clause for civilian agencies),  
DFARS 252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (DOD techni-  
cal data commercial items clause); FAR  
52.227-14 Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987) (ci-  
vilian agency technical data and noncommer-  
cial computer software clause); and/or FAR  
12.211 and FAR 12.212 (commercial item ac-  
quisitions), as applicable. In case of conflict  
between any of the FAR and DFARS provisions  
listed herein and this License, the construc-  
tion that provides greater limitations on the  
Governments rights shall control. Contractor/  
manufacturer is Tele Atlas North America,  
Inc., 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766-  
1445. Phone: 603.643. 0330. The Data is  
8
Additional Provisions with respect to  
POI Data only.  
a
b
c
No Creation of Mailing Lists.  
You are prohibited from using the POIs (i) to  
create mailing lists or (ii) for other such si-  
milar uses.  
Compliance.  
You will use the POIs in compliance with all  
applicable federal, state and local laws,  
rules and regulations.  
Indemnification.  
You shall indemnify and hold infoUSA, Inc.  
harmless against all third party claims or  
liability which are based in whole or in part  
of the users failure to comply with such  
laws, rules and regulations or which result  
from the use of the POIs through you.  
Warranty.  
©1984-2008 by Tele Atlas. ALL RIGHTS RE-  
SERVED. For purpose of any public disclosure  
provision under any federal, state or local law,  
d
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
In addition to the Warranties contained in  
the Agreement, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT  
THE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN AS IS”  
BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE, AND  
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES  
MADE WHETHER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
or unenforceable, such provision or part there-  
of shall be stricken from this Agreement and  
the remainder of this Agreement shall be  
valid, legal, and enforceable to the maximum  
extent possible. Any notice under this Agree-  
ment shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas  
North America, Inc., Attention Contracts De-  
partment, 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH  
03766 USA. The covenants and obligations un-  
dertaken by you herein are intended for the di-  
rect benefit of Tele Atlas and may be enforced  
by Tele Atlas directly against you.  
e
POIs Segregation.  
You are prohibited from combining or mer-  
ging the POIs with any other POI data. The  
POIs shall be maintained in such a way  
that they are separately identifiable from all  
other POI data at all times.  
About the Data for the Map  
Database  
9
Agreement in English.  
!
!
!
This database was developed and recorded  
up to May 2007. Changes to streets/high-  
ways made after that time may not be re-  
flected in this database.  
It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use  
any part or the whole of this map in any  
form without permission from the copyright  
owner.  
If the local traffic regulations or conditions  
deviate from this data, follow the local traf-  
fic regulations (such as signs, indications,  
etc.) and conditions (such as construction,  
weather, etc.).  
The parties hereto confirm that they have re-  
quested that this Agreement and all attach-  
ments and related documents be drafted in  
English.  
Les parties ont exigé que le présent contrat et  
tous les documents attachés soient rédigés en  
Anglais.  
10 Miscellaneous.  
This is the exclusive and complete Agreement  
between Tele Atlas and you regarding its sub-  
ject matter. Nothing in this Agreement shall  
create a joint venture, partnership or principal-  
agent relationship between Tele Atlas and you.  
The internal laws of California shall govern  
this Agreement and you consent to the juris-  
diction of the Northern District of California or  
the State of California for the County of Santa  
Clara. Sections 2 10 shall survive the expira-  
tion or termination of this Agreement. This  
Agreement may be amended, altered, or modi-  
fied only by Tele Atlas. You may not assign any  
part of this Agreement without Tele Atlasprior  
written consent. You acknowledge and under-  
stand that the Data may be subject to restric-  
tions on exportation and agree to comply with  
any applicable export laws. In the event that  
any provision or part of a provision of this  
Agreement is determined to be invalid, illegal,  
!
The traffic regulation data used in the map  
database applies only to standard sized  
passenger vehicles. Note that regulations  
for larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other  
non-standard vehicles are not included in  
the database.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
Copyright Notices for  
North American data  
Manual Overview  
This manual provides the important informa-  
tion you need to make full use of your new na-  
vigation system. Please note that when you  
have decided what you want to do, you can  
find the page you need from the Contents. If  
you want to check the meaning of each item  
displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-  
cessary page from the Display Information”  
section at the end of the manual.  
1) Tele Atlas® MultiNet® North America data.  
As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice  
for Tele Atlas® MultiNet® North America is:  
NOTICE  
© 1984 2008 Tele Atlas. All rights reserved.  
This material is proprietary and the subject of  
copyright protection and other intellectual  
property rights owned or licensed to Tele Atlas.  
Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of se-  
lected Statistics Canada computer files under  
Agreement number 6776. The product in-  
cludes information copied with permission  
from Canadian authorities, including © Cana-  
da Post Corporation and GeoBase®, All rights  
reserved. The product is sourced in part from  
Geography Division, Statistics Canada, 2006  
Road Network File (RNF), 92-500-XWE/XWF.  
The incorporation of data sources from Statis-  
tics Canada within this product shall not be  
construed as constituting an endorsement by  
Statistics Canada of such product. The use of  
this material is subject to the terms of a Li-  
cense Agreement. You will be held liable for  
any unauthorized copying or disclosure of this  
material.  
How to use this manual  
For safety reasons, it is particularly important  
that you fully understand your navigation sys-  
tem before using it. Be sure to read Introduc-  
tion, Chapter 2 in particular.  
Introduction  
This chapter describes the information be-  
fore using the navigation system (e.g. Li-  
Basic Operation  
This chapter describes the names of each  
part of the navigation system and the basic  
operations of this navigation system. It also  
describes basic operations for playing a CD  
in the navigation system.  
2) As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice  
for all third-party brand icons (the Brand  
Icons) are located in the operators manual  
included in the Licensed Products.  
3) As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice  
with logo for infoUSA, Inc. is:  
Navigation Menu and Map Display  
Describes how to display the navigation  
menu screen, and the method of changing  
map view or map scale.  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
This section describes various ways of  
searching the destination, editing the cur-  
rent route conditions, and the route opera-  
tion during route guidance.  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
Describes convenient functions for naviga-  
tion, including how to organize information  
on places you have visited.  
© 2008 INCREMENT P CORP. ALL RIGHTS RE-  
SERVED.  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
!
!
Extra information, alternative use and other  
notes are presented like this:  
e.g.)  
p After removing the disc from the slot,  
keep it in the case.  
The references are indicated like this:  
e.g.)  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
Customizing Your Navigation System  
The behavior of your navigation system de-  
pends on a number of settings. If you need  
to change any of the initial settings (default  
settings), read the relevant section of this  
chapter.  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive  
and Radio)  
Describes how to use DVD-Video, CD, ROM,  
DivX and the radio.  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equip-  
ment)  
About the definition of  
terminology  
When Pioneer AV equipment is connected  
to the navigation system, that equipment  
can be operated from the navigation system.  
This chapter describes the operation of the  
AV source that can be used when Pioneer  
AV equipment is connected.  
Front Displayand Rear Display”  
In this manual, the screen that is attached to  
the body of this navigation unit will be referred  
to as the Front Display. Any additional op-  
tional screen that is purchased for use in con-  
junction with this navigation unit will be  
referred to as the Rear Display.  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
Using the AV source, various settings are  
available to suit your audio-visual taste. This  
chapter describes how to change the set-  
tings.  
Video image”  
Appendix  
Video imagein this manual indicates the  
moving image of DVD-Video, DivX, iPod vi-  
deos, and the equipment that is connected to  
this system with a RCA cable, such as a gener-  
al-purpose AV equipment.  
Read the appendix to learn more about your  
navigation system and such information as  
the availability of after-care. Please see Dis-  
play Informationsection at the end of this  
manual for checking the details of each  
item on the menu.  
Terminology  
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read  
the following information about the conven-  
tions used in this manual. Familiarity with  
these conventions will help you greatly as you  
learn how to use your new equipment.  
!
Buttons on your navigation system are de-  
scribed in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:  
e.g.)  
MENU button, MAP button.  
Items in the different menus or touch panel  
keys available on the screen are described  
in brackets [ ] and bold:  
!
e.g.)  
[Destination], [Settings].  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
p Never set the volume of your navigation  
system so high that you cannot hear out-  
side traffic and emergency vehicles.  
p To promote safety, certain functions are dis-  
abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or  
the parking brake is applied.  
p The data encoded in the disc for the naviga-  
tion system is the intellectual property of  
the provider, and the provider is responsible  
for such content.  
Important Safety Information  
Before using your navigation system, be sure  
to read and fully understand the following  
safety information:  
p Read the entire manual before operating  
this navigation system.  
p The navigation features of your navigation  
system (and rear view camera option if pur-  
chased) are intended solely as an aid to  
you in the operation of your vehicle. It is  
not a substitute for your attentiveness,  
judgment, and care when driving.  
p Keep this manual handy as a reference for  
operating procedures and safety informa-  
tion.  
p Do not operate this navigation system (or  
the rear view camera option if purchased) if  
doing so will divert your attention in any  
way from the safe operation of your vehicle.  
Always observe safe driving rules and fol-  
low all existing traffic regulations. If you ex-  
perience difficulty in operating the system  
or reading the display, park your vehicle in  
a safe location and apply the parking brake  
before making the necessary adjustments.  
p Never allow others to use the system un-  
less they have read and understood the op-  
erating instructions.  
p Never use this navigation system to route  
to hospitals, police stations, or similar facil-  
ities in an emergency. Please call 911.  
p Route and guidance information displayed  
by this equipment is for reference purposes  
only. It may not accurately reflect the latest  
permissible routes, road conditions, one  
way streets, road closures, or traffic restric-  
tions.  
p Pay close attention to all warnings in this  
manual and follow the instructions care-  
fully.  
p Do not install the navigation unit where it  
may (i) obstruct the drivers vision, (ii) im-  
pair the performance of any of the vehicles  
operating systems or safety features, in-  
cluding air bags, hazard lamp buttons or  
(iii) impair the drivers ability to safely oper-  
ate the vehicle.  
p Please remember to wear your seat belt at  
all times while operating your vehicle. If  
you are ever in an accident, your injuries  
can be considerably more severe if your  
seat belt is not properly buckled.  
p Using the most current map DVDs will  
allow for most accurate destination map-  
ping. Upgrade DVDs are available for pur-  
chase through your local Pioneer dealer.  
p Never use headphones while driving.  
WARNING  
p Traffic restrictions and advisories currently  
in force should always take precedence  
over guidance given by the navigation sys-  
tem. Always obey current traffic restric-  
tions, even if the navigation system  
Do not attempt to install or service your naviga-  
tion system by yourself. Installation or servicing  
of the navigation system by persons without train-  
ing and experience in electronic equipment and  
automotive accessories may be dangerous and  
could expose you to the risk of electric shock or  
other hazards.  
provides contrary advice.  
p Failure to input correct information about  
the local time may result in the navigation  
system providing improper routing and gui-  
dance instructions.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
Notes Before Using the System  
After-sales service for Pioneer products  
Please contact the dealer or distributor from  
which you purchased the product for after-  
sales service (including warranty conditions)  
or any other information. In case the necessary  
information is not available, please contact the  
companies listed below.  
Information to User  
Alteration or modifications carried out without  
appropriate authorization may invalidate the  
users right to operate the equipment.  
Please do not ship your product to the compa-  
nies at the addresses listed below for repair  
without making advance contact.  
For Canadian model  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with  
Canadian ICES-003.  
!
U.S.A  
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.  
CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION  
P.O. Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760  
800-421-1404  
Important (Serial Number:)  
The serial number of this device is located on the  
bottom of this product. For your own security and  
convenience, be sure to record this number on  
the enclosed warranty card.  
!
CANADA  
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.  
CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT  
300 Allstate Parkway Markham, Ontario  
L3R 0P2  
1-877-283-5901  
905-479-4411  
Failure to operate  
Should the navigation system fail to operate  
properly, contact your dealer or nearest  
authorized Pioneer Service Station.  
For warranty information, please see the Lim-  
ited Warranty sheet included with your pro-  
duct.  
Visit Our Web site  
Visit us at the following site:  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com  
In Canada  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca  
1
Register your product. We will keep the details  
of your purchase on file to help you refer to  
this information in the event of an insurance  
claim such as loss or theft.  
2
3
Receive updates on the latest products and  
technologies.  
Download owners manuals, order product  
catalogues, research new products, and  
much more.  
4
Receive notices of software upgrades and  
software updates.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
Precaution  
The backlighting lamp of LCD in this  
equipment contains mercury. Dispo-  
sal of this material may be regulated  
due to environmental considerations  
according to Local, State or Federal  
Laws. For disposal or recycling infor-  
mation, please contact your local  
authorities or the Electronics Indus-  
tries Alliance:  
CAUTION:  
USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PER-  
FORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN  
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN  
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.  
CAUTION:  
THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH  
THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HA-  
ZARD.  
www.eiae.org  
CAUTION  
!
!
Protect this product from moisture.  
If the battery is disconnected or dis-  
charged, the memory will be erased and  
must be reprogrammed.  
Do not allow this product to come into contact  
with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also,  
damage to the product, smoke, and overheating  
could result from contact with liquids.  
WARNING  
Handling the cord on this product or cords asso-  
ciated with accessories sold with the product  
may expose you to chemicals listed on proposi-  
tion 65 known to the State of California and other  
governmental entities to cause cancer and birth  
defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands  
after handling.  
Additional Safety Information  
To ensure safe driving  
Parking brake interlock  
Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD-  
Video and certain touch key operations) of-  
fered by this navigation system could be dan-  
gerous and/or unlawful if used while driving.  
To prevent such functions from being used  
while the vehicle is in motion, there is an inter-  
lock system that senses when the parking  
brake is set and when the vehicle is moving. If  
you attempt to use the functions described  
above while driving, they will become disabled  
until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and  
apply the parking brake. Please keep the brake  
pedal pushed down before releasing the park-  
ing brake.  
This product contains mercury. Dis-  
posal of this material may be regu-  
lated due to environmental  
considerations. For disposal or recy-  
cling information, please contact  
your local authorities or the Electro-  
nics Industries Alliance:  
www.eiae.org  
WARNING  
!
To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the  
potential violation of applicable laws, the navi-  
gation system is not for use with a Video  
imagethat is visible to the driver.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
!
!
In some countries the viewing of Video  
imageon a display inside a vehicle even by  
persons other than the driver may be illegal.  
Where such regulations apply, they must be  
obeyed.  
When applying the parking brake in order to  
view Video imageor to enable other func-  
tions offered by the navigation system, park  
your vehicle in a safe place, and keep the  
brake pedal pushed down before releasing the  
parking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hill  
or otherwise might move when releasing the  
parking brake.  
Color difference of the map  
display between day and night  
Night display  
The examples in this manual are illustrated  
using the daytime display. When driving at  
night, the colors you see may differ from those  
shown.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
CAUTION  
!
Accuracy/performance of interlock may be im-  
pacted by such factors as GPS signal detec-  
tion, speed pulse wire connectivity, and  
driving habits or conditions of the place where  
the vehicle is parked.  
When using a display connected  
to REAR OUT (VIDEO OUT)  
This products REAR OUT (VIDEO OUT) is for  
connection of a display to enable passengers  
in the rear seats to watch video images.  
!
!
It is strongly suggested that the speed pulse  
wire be connected for accuracy of navigation  
and better performance of interlock.  
If the speed pulse wire is unavailable for some  
reason, it is recommended that the pulse gen-  
erator ND-PG1 (sold separately) be used.  
WARNING  
NEVER install the Rear Display in a location that  
enables the driver to watch video images while  
driving.  
When you attempt to watch Video image”  
while driving, the warning Viewing of front  
seat video source while driving is strictly  
prohibited.will appear on the screen. To  
watch Video imageon this display, stop the  
vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking  
brake. Please keep the brake pedal pushed  
down before releasing the parking brake.  
To avoid battery exhaustion  
Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using  
this product. Using this product without run-  
ning the engine can result in battery drainage.  
WARNING  
Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an  
ACC position.  
Rear view camera  
With an optional rear view camera, you are  
able to use the navigation system as an aid to  
keep an eye on trailers, or backing into a tight  
parking spot.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
Variety of view modes  
Various types of screen display can be se-  
lected for navigation guidance.  
WARNING  
!
!
SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED.  
USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR  
IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE  
MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE.  
CAUTION  
!
!
The rear view camera function is to be used  
as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or while  
backing up. Do not use for entertainment pur-  
poses.  
Wide variety of facility  
information for Points of  
Interest (POI) Search  
You can search your destination from all  
areas. Approximately 12.3 million POIs are in-  
cluded in the database.  
Please note that the edges of the rear view  
camera images may differ slightly according  
to whether full screen images are displayed  
when backing up, and whether the images are  
used for checking the rear when the vehicle is  
moving forward.  
Some POI information may not be accurate or  
may become inaccurate through the passage  
of time. Please directly contact the POI to veri-  
fy the accuracy of the information about the  
POI which appears in this database. POI infor-  
mation is subject to change without notice.  
CAUTION  
The rear view mode is to use the navigation sys-  
tem as an aid to keep an eye on the trailers, or  
while backing up. Do not use this function for en-  
tertainment purposes.  
Purchasing software upgrade  
Auto Reroute Function  
Using the most current map DVDs will allow  
for most accurate destination mapping. Up-  
grade DVDs are available for purchase  
through your local Pioneer dealer.  
If you deviate from the set route, the system  
will re-calculate the route from that point so  
that you remain on track to the destination.  
p This function may not work in certain  
areas.  
Features  
Touch panel key operation  
Assign an Original Image as a  
Background Image  
It is possible to operate the navigation func-  
tion and the audio function by using touch  
panel key.  
You can store your own pictures on a CD-R/-  
RW and DVD-R/-RW in JPEG format and im-  
port original images in this navigation system.  
These imported images can be set as a back-  
ground image.  
p Imported original images will be stored in  
the memory, but saving cannot be guaran-  
teed completely. If original image data is  
deleted, set the CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW  
again and re-import the original image.  
Compatible with the memory  
navi mode  
Memory navigation functions are provided  
with the hardware. For details, refer to Memory  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
DVD-Video playback  
AAC file playback  
It is possible to play back DVD-Video, DVD-R  
(video mode) and DVD-RW (video mode).  
p Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may  
constitute an infringement on the authors  
rights protected by the Copyright Law.  
= For more information, refer to Playable  
You can play back AAC files recorded on CD-  
R/-RW/-ROM and DVD-R/-RW/-ROM.  
DivX® video file playback  
You can play back DivX video files recorded on  
CD-R/-RW/-ROM and DVD-R/-RW/-ROM.  
= For more information, refer to Handling and  
NTSC compatibility  
This product is NTSC system compatible.  
When connecting other components to the  
product, be sure components are compatible  
with the same video system or else images will  
not be correctly reproduced.  
CD playback  
Music CD/CD-R/CD-RW playback is possible.  
= For more information, refer to Playable  
= For more information, refer to Handling and  
Auto CD title and MP3/WMA/  
AAC file listing  
Title lists will automatically be displayed when  
a CD TEXT, MP3, WMA or AAC disc is played.  
This system provides easy-to-operate audio  
functions that allow playback simply by select-  
ing an item from the list.  
MP3 file playback  
It is possible to play back MP3 files recorded  
on CD-R/-RW/-ROM and DVD-R/-RW/-ROM.  
p Supply of this navigation system only con-  
veys a license for private, non-commercial  
use and does not convey a license nor  
imply any right to use this product in any  
commercial (i.e. revenuegenerating) real  
time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite,  
cable and/or any other media), broadcast-  
ing/streaming via internet, intranets and/or  
other networks or in other electronic con-  
tent distribution systems, such as pay-  
audio or audio-on-demand applications. An  
independent license for such use is re-  
quired. For details, please visit  
iPod® compatibility  
When you use this navigation system with the  
Interface cable for iPod® (CD-I200) (sold sepa-  
rately), you can control an iPod with Dock con-  
nector.  
For more details about iPod compatibility with  
this navigation system, check the information  
on our website.  
p To obtain maximum performance, we re-  
commend that you use the latest version of  
the iPod software.  
p Operations may vary depending on the soft-  
ware version of iPod.  
http://www.mp3licensing.com.  
= For more information, refer to Playable  
= For more information, refer to Handling and  
p iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-  
tered in the U.S. and other countries.  
WMA file playback  
You can play back WMA files recorded on CD-  
R/-RW/-ROM and DVD-R/-RW/-ROM.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.  
© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
Hands-free phoning  
Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200)  
(sold separately), this unit realizes effortless  
hands-free phoning with Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
Multi-aspect  
Switching between wide screen, letter box and  
panscan display is possible.  
Bluetooth audio player  
compatibility  
Using a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200)  
(sold separately), you can control a Bluetooth  
audio player featuring Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology.  
Multi-audio, Multi-subtitle, and  
Multi-angle  
You can switch between multiple audio sys-  
tems, subtitle languages and multiple viewing  
angles of a scene recorded on a DVD as de-  
sired.  
p This product incorporates copyright protec-  
tion technology that is protected by method  
claims of certain U.S. patents and other in-  
tellectual property rights owned by  
Dolby Digital  
When using Pioneer multi-channel processors  
that are planned to be compatible with this na-  
vigation system, please consult your dealer or  
nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station.  
p Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. Dolbyand the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Macrovision Corporation and other rights  
owners. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended  
for home and other limited viewing uses  
only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engi-  
neering or disassembly is prohibited.  
Laboratories.  
Rear entertainment  
Video from sources with video can be dis-  
played on the rear display.  
About DTS sound  
Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If  
this units optical digital outputs are not con-  
nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select  
an audio setting other than DTS.  
Rear view camera ready  
You can display what is behind the vehicle if  
connected to a rear view camera (e.g. ND-  
BC2) (sold separately).  
= For details, refer to Rear view camera on  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent  
#: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and worldwide pa-  
tents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital  
Out are registered trademarks and the DTS  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
p Depending on the amount of data being  
transmitted in your area, it may take several  
minutes to display all of the available data.  
p The information content depends on the in-  
formation provided by XM NavTraffic Ser-  
vice, including data refreshing and  
Data communication function  
with XM tuner  
If you connect the optional XM tuner (GEX-  
P10XMT) to the navigation system, you can  
use traffic information as a part of the naviga-  
tion function. A separate subscription for XM  
NavTraffic is required.  
In addition, if you subscribe to XM Audio ser-  
vices, you can utilize the XM display featuring  
station logos and category icons, to improve  
your XM Audio experience.  
availability timing.  
p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the  
accuracy of the information transmitted.  
p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for  
changes to information services provided  
by XM, such as cancellation of the services  
or subscription updates.  
p Traffic information is not taken into account  
when calculating estimated time of arrival  
time or travel time for your destination.  
p The broadcast station icons contained on  
this disc are based on the data provided by  
XM Satellite Radio as of October 2007. Any  
subsequent changes made by XM Satellite  
Radio in the lineup or icon of the broadcast  
station in the future may not be supported  
by the navigation system, and may cause  
the unit not to display the correct icons.  
Playable Discs  
About DVD-Video and CD  
DVD and CD discs that display the logos  
shown below generally can be played back on  
this built-in DVD drive.  
DVD-Video  
About XM NavTraffic Service  
and Pioneer Navigation  
p XM NavTraffic subscription is required and  
is available only in select markets. Check  
www.xmnavtraffic.com for service availabil-  
ity, pricing information, and other details.  
The availability of XM NavTraffic data de-  
pends on the ability of the antenna to re-  
ceive a signal. The signal may be  
CD  
unavailable if obstructed (e.g., by buildings,  
mountains, trees, bridges, bad weather,  
etc.). XM NavTraffic data also may be una-  
vailable or not current if the original data  
source is not providing data (e.g., sched-  
uled or unscheduled downtime) or has not  
been updated, or if there is a time lag be-  
tween the time when the original data  
source is updated and when you receive  
the updated XM NavTraffic data.  
p
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
p It is not possible to play back DVD-Audio  
discs. This DVD drive may not be able to  
play all discs bearing the marks shown  
above.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
About AVCHD recorded discs  
Mark  
Meaning  
This unit is not compatible with discs recorded  
in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-  
nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If  
inserted, the disc may not be ejected.  
Indicates the number of audio sys-  
tems.  
2
Indicates the number of subtitle lan-  
guages.  
2
Indicates the number of viewing an-  
gles.  
3
About Dual layer disc  
Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio:  
screen width-to-height ratio) type.  
The unit cannot play back DVD-R/-RW discs  
that are written in Layer Jump Recording  
mode. For more information about the writing  
method, see the operation manual for the writ-  
ing device.  
16 : 9 LB  
1
Indicates the number of the region  
where playback is possible.  
ALL  
If marks other than those listed are found on  
DVD disc labels and packages, please ask the  
DVD disc supplier for their meaning.  
About DVD Map Disc  
You can use discs intended for this navigation  
system. Use only discs approved by Pioneer.  
= For details, refer to DVD Map Discs on page  
About WMA  
DVD-Video disc region numbers  
DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-  
gion numbers cannot be played on this DVD  
drive. The region number of the player can be  
found on the bottom of this product. The illus-  
tration below shows the regions and corre-  
sponding region numbers.  
The Windows Medialogo printed on the box  
indicates that this unit can play back WMA  
data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio  
and refers to an audio compression technol-  
ogy that is developed by Microsoft  
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by  
using Windows Media Player version 7 or  
later. Windows Media and the Windows logo  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
Notes  
!
!
This unit may not operate correctly depending  
on the application used to encode WMA files.  
Depending on the version of Windows Media  
Player used to encode WMA files, album  
names and other text information may not be  
correctly displayed.  
What the Marks on DVDs  
Indicate  
The marks below may be found on DVD disc  
labels and packages. They indicate the type of  
images and audio recorded on the disc, and  
the functions you can use.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
!
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of WMA files encoded with image  
data.  
About the SAT RADIO  
READY Logo  
About AAC  
The SAT RADIO READY logo printed below the  
CD loading slot indicates that the Satellite  
Radio Tuner for Pioneer (i. e., XM tuner and  
Sirius satellite tuner which are sold separately)  
can be controlled by this navigation system.  
Please inquire with your dealer or nearest  
authorized Pioneer service station regarding  
the satellite radio tuner that can be connected  
to this navigation system.  
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-  
eral applications can be used to encode AAC  
files, but file formats and extensions differ de-  
pending on the application which is used to  
encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-  
coded by iTunes® version 4.6.  
p iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-  
tered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Note:  
The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver  
broadcasting technology to provide listeners  
in their cars and at home with crystal-clear  
sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satel-  
lite radio will create and package over 100  
channels of digital- quality music, news,  
sports, talk and childrens programming.  
SAT Radio, the SAT Radio logo and all re-  
lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite  
Radio inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc.  
About DivX  
DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-  
ated by the DivX® video codec from DivX, Inc.  
This unit can play DivX video files recorded on  
CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs.  
Keeping the same terminology as DVD video,  
individual DivX video files are called Titles.  
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a  
DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind  
that by default they will be played in alphabeti-  
cal order. Official DivX® Certified product.  
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including  
DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX®  
media files.  
About the XM NAVTRAFFIC  
Logo  
Required $12.95 basic monthly XM radio sub-  
scription and XM NavTraffic service subscrip-  
tions sold separately. XM NavTraffic only  
available in select markets. Other fees and  
taxes, including a one-time activation fee, may  
apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All  
fees and programming subject to change.  
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement  
available at xmradio.com. XM radio service  
only available in the 48 contiguous United  
States and Canada.  
p DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos  
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used  
under license.  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
© 2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights re-  
served.  
Resetting the Microprocessor  
CAUTION  
Pressing RESET button deletes the contents of  
the systems memory.  
About the data being deleted  
NAVTEQ Trafficis a trademark of NAVTEQ  
North America, LLC.  
© 2008. NAVTEQ North America, LLC.  
The information is erased by pressing RESET  
button or disconnecting the yellow lead from  
the battery (or removing the battery itself).  
However, the following items are not erased:  
!
!
Sensor learning status and driving status  
Memory areas that were memorized manu-  
ally  
Designate Areas to Avoid  
Registered Locations in Address Book”  
Data registered in Emergency Info”  
To Protect the LCD Panel  
and Screen  
!
!
!
p Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the  
LCD screen when this product is not being  
used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight  
can result in LCD screen malfunction due  
to the resulting high temperatures.  
p When using a cellular phone, keep the an-  
tenna of the cellular phone away from the  
display to prevent disruption of the video by  
the appearance of spots, colored stripes,  
etc.  
Reset the navigation system to  
the initial (factory) setting  
Pressing RESET button of the navigation sys-  
tem lets you reset the microprocessor to its in-  
itial settings.  
When you want to erase memorized settings  
and return the navigation system to its initial  
(factory) settings, carry out the following op-  
erations.  
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be  
sure to touch the touch panel keys with a  
finger. (The stylus is supplied for special ca-  
librations. Do not use the stylus for normal  
operations.)  
%
Press RESET button with a pen tip or  
p Using force to manually adjust the LCD  
panel angle may damage the LCD panel.  
other pointed instrument.  
RESET button  
For Viewing LCD Comfortably  
Due to its construction, the viewing angle of  
the LCD screen is limited. The viewing angle  
(vertical and horizontal) can be increased,  
however, by using Brightness to adjust the  
black density of the video. When using for the  
first time, adjust the black density in accor-  
dance with the viewing angle (vertical and hor-  
izontal) to adjust for clear viewing. Dimmer  
can also be used to adjust the brightness of  
the LCD screen itself to suit your personal pre-  
ference.  
The microprocessor must be reset under the  
following conditions:  
!
Prior to using this product for the first time  
after installation.  
!
If the product fails to operate properly.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
!
!
!
If there appear to be problems with the op-  
eration of the system.  
When changing the combination of the  
equipment.  
When adding/removing additional pro-  
ducts that connect to the navigation sys-  
tem.  
Initial Use  
If the initial learning is not complete, following  
screen appears.  
%
If a message appears, touch [OK].  
p If you have connected other equipment (for  
example, Bluetooth adapter) to this naviga-  
tion system, be sure to reset that equip-  
ment too.  
When the navigation system begins running  
for the first time, the 3D Hybrid Sensor auto-  
matically begins initial learning. Positioning is  
performed solely by GPS satellites until the 3D  
Hybrid Sensor initial learning is complete, so  
the location of your vehicle may not be very ac-  
curate. This is not an error. When the initial  
learning is complete, the location of your vehi-  
cle can be detected with high accuracy.  
p [Shop Demo] is the demonstration used in  
a store. Do not touch [Shop Demo].  
DVD Map Discs for Your  
Navigation System  
Configuration of data recorded  
on discs  
The map for this navigation system is supplied  
on two discs: one for the west and the other  
for the east. Please set the disc to use accord-  
ing to your destination or current location.  
The areas recorded on each disc are as fol-  
lows:  
= If an error message appears during initial  
learning, refer to Messages and how to  
West area disc  
East area disc  
p Removing the disc and inserting other disc  
causes the navigation system to automati-  
cally restart and reload the new route. (This  
automatic Rerouteoperation cannot be  
canceled.)  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic Operation  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
g
f
ae d c b  
a
9
8 DETACH button  
Press to remove the front panel from the dis-  
play unit.  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
Navigation unit  
This chapter gives information about the  
names of the parts and the main features  
using the buttons.  
1 Disc indicator  
When a disc is set in navigation system, this  
indicator lights.  
9 OPEN/CLOSE button  
Press to open or close the LCD panel.  
Press and hold to display Flap Setup  
screen.  
= For more details about Flap Setup,  
2 LCD panel  
3 LCD screen  
4 AV button  
a o/p button  
Press to display the AV operation screen.  
Press to perform manual seek tuning, fast  
forward, reverse and track search controls.  
5 MAP button  
Press to view the map or change view  
mode.  
b EJECT button  
c PHONE button  
6 MENU button  
Press to display BT-TEL operation screen.  
Press and hold to switch the indication of  
sub display in the following order:  
Present time No indication AV source  
information  
Press to display the navigation menu or AV  
menu.  
7 RESET button  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
d Front panel  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic Operation  
02  
e Disc loading slot  
Inserting/Ejecting a Disc  
Inserting a disc  
f Sub display  
Displays the current time or information  
about the AV source that is currently play-  
ing.  
%
Insert a disc into the disc loading slot.  
g VOLUME knob  
Turn to adjust the AV (Audio and Video) vo-  
lume or press to change the AV source.  
Press and hold VOLUME knob to switch the  
source to mute.  
p The DVD drive plays one standard 12-cm or  
8-cm (single) disc at a time. Do not use an  
adapter when playing 8-cm discs.  
p Do not insert anything other than a disc  
into the disc loading slot.  
Flow from Startup to  
Termination  
p If the program is not installed, see page  
156 and install the program.  
1
Start the engine.  
Ejecting a disc  
The navigation system is also turned on.  
After some time, the navigation opening  
screen comes on for a few seconds. Then, a  
message screen is displayed.  
%
Press EJECT button.  
The disc is ejected.  
p Insert the Pioneer DVD Map Disc to the  
Opening and Closing the  
LCD panel  
disc loading slot.  
2
Check the details of the caution mes-  
sage and touch [OK].  
CAUTION  
Do not close the LCD panel with hands by  
force. This may cause malfunction.  
Keep hands and fingers clear of the display  
unit when opening, closing, or adjusting the  
LCD panel. Be especially cautious of chil-  
drens hands and fingers.  
You can operate the navigation system by  
touching keys displayed on the screen. The  
map of your surroundings is displayed.  
!
!
3
Turn off the vehicle engine.  
This navigation system is also turned off.  
p This product also can be switched off by  
turning the ACC (ignition) OFF.  
The LCD panel will open or close automatically  
by turning the ignition switch on or off. You  
can turn off the automatic open/close func-  
tion.  
p The automatic open/close function will op-  
erate the display as follows:  
When the ignition switch is turned OFF  
while the LCD panel is open, the LCD  
panel will close after a few moments.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic Operation  
When the ignition switch is turned ON  
again (or turned to ACC), the LCD panel  
will open automatically.  
Removing or attaching the front panel  
will automatically close or open the LCD  
panel.  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
3
Touch [ESC].  
p When the ignition switch is turned OFF  
after the LCD panel has been closed, turn-  
ing the ignition switch ON again (or turning  
it to ACC) will not open the LCD panel. In  
this case, press OPEN/CLOSE button to  
open the LCD panel.  
p When closing the LCD panel, check to  
make sure that it has closed completely. If  
the LCD panel has stopped halfway, leaving  
it like this could result in damage.  
When Flap Setup screen is displayed during  
the navigation screen, the map screen is dis-  
played. When Flap Setup screen is displayed  
during the AV screen, the current AV operation  
screen is displayed.  
p If you can hear the LCD panel knocking  
against your vehicles console or dash-  
board, press o button to move the LCD  
panel slightly forward.  
p When adjusting the LCD panel angle, be  
sure to press o or p button. Manually  
adjusting the LCD panel by hand may da-  
mage it.  
%
Press OPEN/CLOSE button to close the  
LCD panel.  
p To open the LCD panel, press OPEN/CLOSE  
button again.  
Setting the LCD panel  
Adjusting the LCD panel angle  
1
Press and hold OPEN/CLOSE button.  
Flap Setup screen appears.  
p The adjusted the LCD panel angle will be  
memorized and LCD panel will automati-  
cally return to this angle the next time the  
LCD panel is opened.  
Setting the slide back function  
2
Press o or p button to adjust the  
You can adjust the LCD panel slide position to  
prevent the display from hitting the shift lever  
of an automatic vehicle when it is in P (park)  
position.  
LCD panel to an easily viewable angle.  
The LCD panel angle continues changing as  
long as you keep pressing and holding o or  
p button.  
p Please be careful, as LCD panel will slide  
immediately after the setting is turned  
[On].  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic Operation  
02  
1
Press and hold OPEN/CLOSE button.  
Removing the front panel  
Flap Setup screen appears.  
1
Press DETACH button to remove the  
front panel.  
2
Touch [Flap Set Back].  
Touching [Flap Set Back] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
2
Gently grip the right side of the front  
panel and slowly pull it outward.  
Take care not to drop the front panel and pro-  
tect it from contact with water or other fluids  
to prevent permanent damage.  
Setting the automatic open  
function  
When you do not wish the display to open/  
close automatically, you can set the automatic  
open function to the manual mode.  
1
Press and hold OPEN/CLOSE button.  
Flap Setup screen appears.  
2
Touch [Auto Flap].  
Each touch of [Auto Flap] changes the set-  
3
Put the front panel into provided pro-  
tings as follows:  
tective case for safe keeping.  
!
!
Manual You have to press OPEN/CLOSE  
button to open/close the display  
Auto The display automatically opens/  
closes when power to navigation system is  
turned on  
Attaching the front panel  
%
Replace the front panel by holding it  
upright to this product and clipping it se-  
curely into the mounting hooks.  
Protecting Your Product  
from Theft  
The front panel can be detached from the dis-  
play unit to discourage theft, as described  
below.  
CAUTION  
!
!
!
!
Never grip the display and the buttons tightly  
or use force when removing or attaching.  
Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive  
shocks.  
Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and  
high temperatures.  
After detaching the front panel, keep it in a  
safe place so it is not scratched or damaged.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic Operation  
About NAVI MENU and AV MENU  
The methods for displaying NAVI MENU, used for navigation operations, and AV MENU, used for AV operations, are  
different depending on which screen is currently displayed.  
Map screen  
NAVI MENU  
Press  
MAP button  
Press  
MENU button  
Press AV button  
Touch  
Press AV button  
Press  
Touch  
or VOLUME knob  
[NAVI MENU]  
or VOLUME knob  
MAP button  
[AV MENU]  
Press  
MENU button  
AV operation screen  
AV MENU  
Basic Navigation  
The most basic search function is Address  
Search, in which the address is specified and  
the destination searched. This section de-  
scribes how to use Address Search and the  
basics of using the navigation system.  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these  
basic navigation functions while your vehicle is in  
motion. To enable these functions, you must stop  
in a safe place and apply the parking brake (refer  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic Operation  
02  
Basic flow of operation  
How to set your destination by  
address  
1 Park your vehicle in a safe place, and apply  
1
Press MAP button to display the map  
the parking brake.  
screen.  
j
2 Insert the Pioneer DVD Map Disc to the  
disc loading slot.  
2
Press MENU button to display NAVI  
MENU.  
3
Touch [Destination] to display Destina-  
j
3 Press MAP button to display the map  
screen.  
tion menu.  
4
Touch [Address Search].  
j
4 Press MENU button to display NAVI  
MENU.  
j
5 Touch [Destination] to display Destination  
menu.  
5
Touch [Zone code key].  
j
6 Select the method of searching for your  
destination.  
If the destination is in another zone, this  
changes the zone setting.  
Zone code key  
j
7 Enter the information about your destina-  
tion.  
j
8 Navigation system calculates the route to  
your destination, and then shows the route  
on the map.  
j
6
Touch the zone code of the destination,  
9 After releasing the parking brake, drive in  
accordance with the navigation guidance,  
subject to the important safety instructions  
noted on page 19 to page 22.  
then touch [OK].  
Selected zone  
Zone code  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic Operation  
7
Input the house number and touch  
City:  
[OK].  
Touch if you wish to first specify the destina-  
tion city or area.  
Touch the characters you wish to input.  
:
The input text is deleted letter by letter from  
the end of the text. Continuing to this will de-  
lete all of the text.  
Sym.:  
You can input symbols such as &and +.  
0-9:  
:
You can input numbers.  
The input text is deleted letter by letter from  
the end of the text. Continuing to this will de-  
lete all of the text.  
Back:  
Returns you to the previous screen.  
p For example, for [Early California Ct], you  
can just enter part of the name, such as  
[California].  
p When entering the characters, the unit will  
automatically query the database for all  
possible options. If there is only one letter  
that could possibly follow your entry, that  
letter will automatically be entered.  
Back:  
Returns you to the previous screen.  
p You may also input a prefix to the house  
number.  
p If the house number you have input is not  
found among subsequently selected  
[Street] or [City] data, a message appears  
saying that the address has not been found.  
In that case, try inputting the house num-  
ber again.  
Searching your destination after specify-  
ing the name of the city or area  
p Touching [OK] with no input allows you to  
specify and search for the name of the  
street, city, or area first.  
You can narrow down the search candidates  
by initially specifying the name of the city or  
area where your destination is located. Input-  
ting the name of the city or area then selecting  
the destination city or area from the list re-  
turns you to the Street Name input screen.  
Now input the street name, select the street  
from the list.  
8
Input the street name.  
Touch the letter you wish to input. If the next  
screen is not automatically displayed even  
though the street name is entered, try touch-  
ing [OK].  
Inputted text  
The number of applicable candidates  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Basic Operation  
02  
In the selected area, if you touch [City] without  
entering the name of the city or area, you can  
set the cities or areas that you have searched  
in the past from the list. (This function is not  
available in the first time and when you have  
selected an area that you have never searched  
before.)  
If you did not input the house number in Step  
7, the house number input screen comes up  
after the [Street] and [City] are determined.  
You should now input the house number (per-  
form Step 7).  
p If there is more than one place for the  
house number input, or if there is no such  
house number in that place, a range of  
house numbers are displayed. To start the  
route calculation, touch the range within  
the list you wish to specify as the destina-  
tion.  
9
Touch the street from the list.  
p You can also see the destination on the  
map by touching the  
list.  
to the right of the  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Scroll bar  
Touching the or on the scroll bar scrolls  
you through the list and allows you to view the  
remaining items.  
If an item cannot be displayed in a single line,  
touching the to the right of the item allows  
you to see the whole line.  
p If you press MENU button, the calculation  
is canceled.  
p After the route calculation, the system start  
storing the map data around the route for  
Memory navi mode.  
p When performing a destination search with  
the route already set, select whether to re-  
gard the specified area as your destination  
and search for a new route, or search for a  
route via that area.  
!
Touching the  
specifies the selected  
street and streets intersecting it, allowing  
you to set an intersection as your destina-  
tion. This is useful when you dont know the  
house number of your destination or can-  
not input the house number of the specified  
street.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
p Once searched for, the location is automati-  
cally stored in [Destination History].  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
!
Touching the  
you have selected. (Candidate place names  
may appear in the list screen.)  
displays a map of the place  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
10 Drive in accordance with the screen  
and voice information.  
Your navigation system gives you the following  
information with the timing adjusted to the  
speed of your vehicle:  
p If the selected street has only one matching  
location, route calculation starts after  
touching the item.  
p A list appears if multiple options exist, se-  
lect the desired one from the list, and pro-  
ceed to the next step.  
!
!
!
!
Distance to the next turning point  
Direction of travel  
Road number of the freeway  
Way point (If this is set)  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
02  
Basic Operation  
!
Your destination  
Memory navi mode  
= If you want to search for another route,  
= If you want to cancel the route guidance,  
While the DVD Map Disc is inserted, you can  
store the map data into the internal memory  
of the navigation system. If the DVD Map Disc  
is removed from the navigation system after  
storing is completed, navigation is performed  
using the data in the memory (memory navi  
mode). When disappears, memory navi  
mode is ready. You can now remove the DVD  
Map Disc. In the memory navi mode, you can  
play a music CD or DVD-Video on the naviga-  
tion system while navigation is taking place.  
The operation automatically switches to the  
memory navi mode when the DVD Map Disc  
is removed from the navigation system.  
Some functions are restricted and different  
from the navigation using the DVD Map Disc  
(DVD navi mode). If you want to use these  
functions, please insert the DVD Map Disc  
again. During the memory navi mode, naviga-  
tion is performed only using the data read into  
the memory.  
p Touching the  
allows you to hear the  
information again.  
p To adjust the navigation volume, go to NAVI  
MENU.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
p If you stop at a gas station or a restaurant  
during the route guidance, your navigation  
system remembers your destination and  
route information. When you start the en-  
gine and get back on the road, route gui-  
dance resumes.  
How to view the map screen  
This section describes only the items that are  
displayed on the map screen.  
p You may need to insert the DVD Map Disc  
and store new data in the memory during  
navigation operation, such as when the  
destination is far away. The memory navi  
mode uses the following map data to per-  
form navigation.  
= Refer to page 158 for more detail in-  
formation.  
4
2
3
1
1 Current location  
2 Distance to the destination  
3 Estimated time of arrival (or travel time  
to your destination)  
4 Memory navi indicator  
= For details, refer to Memory Navi Mode  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic Operation  
02  
p Touch [REAR SCREEN] to select the source  
for Rear Display.  
Basic AV Source  
This section describes basic AV operations,  
such as adjusting the volume, switching the  
source and stopping the source, using CD op-  
erations as an example.  
p Touch [TRAFFIC] to switch to XM or SIRIUS  
screen that memorized traffic channel.  
p Sources that are not connected to the navi-  
gation system, sources that are busy read-  
ing a disc or magazine, and sources with  
incomplete settings cannot be used.  
p The term external unitrefers to a Pioneer  
product (such as one available in the fu-  
ture) that, although incompatible as a  
source, enables control of basic functions  
by the navigation system. Two external units  
can be controlled by the navigation system.  
When two external units are connected, the  
navigation system allocates them to exter-  
nal unit 1 or external unit 2.  
Selecting an AV source  
1
Press VOLUME knob (or AV button) to  
switch to the AV operation screen.  
2
Press MENU button to change to AV  
p When [Antenna Control] mode is set to  
[Radio], the vehicles antenna can be  
stowed or turned off by following the in-  
structions below.  
MENU.  
3
Touch the source icon to select the de-  
sired source in AV Source screen.  
Change the source from radio (AM or  
FM) to another source.  
Turn the source off.  
Turn off the ignition switch (ACC OFF).  
If [Antenna Control] mode is set to  
[Power], the vehicles antenna can be  
stowed or turned off only when the ACC is  
set to OFF.  
p Also, press VOLUME knob repeatedly when  
the AV operation screen is displayed to  
switch between sources:  
Adjusting the volume  
[DISC] (CD, ROM, DVD-V, DivX (built-in DVD  
drive)) [RADIO] (tuner) [iPod] (iPod)  
[XM] (XM tuner) [SIRIUS] (SIRIUS  
tuner) [USB] (USB audio) [BT-TEL]  
(Bluetooth Telephone) [BT-AUDIO]  
(Bluetooth Audio) [M-CD] (multi-CD  
player) [M-DVD] (multi-DVD player) —  
[AV-1] (video input1) [AV-2] (video  
input2) [EXT-1] (external unit 1) —  
[EXT-2] (external unit 2) [OFF] (source  
off)  
%
Use VOLUME knob to adjust the audio  
sound level.  
Rotate VOLUME knob to increase or decrease  
the volume.  
p To adjust the navigation volume (voice gui-  
dance), access [Volume] in NAVI MENU.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
p Touch [OFF] to switch the source to OFF.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic Operation  
3
Press VOLUME knob (or AV button) to  
Turning the source off  
switch DISC operation screen.  
1
Press VOLUME knob (or AV button) to  
switch to the AV operation screen.  
2
Press MENU button to change to AV  
MENU.  
3
Touch [OFF] in AV Source screen.  
p Press and hold VOLUME knob to switch  
the source to mute.  
Current track information  
How to listen to a CD  
You can listen to an audio CD by removing the  
DVD Map Disc from the navigation system.  
(For details, refer to page 158.)  
1
Press EJECT button to remove the DVD  
Map Disc.  
4
Rotate VOLUME knob to adjust the vo-  
lume.  
5
Touch o or p to select a track you  
want to listen to.  
Information of the track being played  
2
Insert the CD to the disc loading slot.  
The audio CD set in the navigation system is  
played.  
You can also select a track by pressing o or  
p button on the hardware.  
6
To fast forward or rewind, keep touch-  
ing o or p.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic Operation  
02  
You can also perform fast rewind/fast forward  
by holding o or p button on the hard-  
ware.  
The function is not available during memory  
navi mode. Or, the function is not available for  
areas not stored on the disc.  
Touching this button activates a message indi-  
cating that the function is not available.  
7
To hide the touch panel key, touch  
[Hide].  
Gray touch panel key with gray letters:  
Information of the Audio source being played  
The function is not available (e.g., operation is  
prohibited while driving).  
Distance to the guidance point  
Current direction of travel  
Next direction of travel  
p If you touch the screen, the touch panel  
keys are displayed again.  
Available buttons  
The availability of a specific button or function-  
ality is indicated by its color. Depending on the  
status of your vehicle, some buttons will be  
available, while others will not be.  
(e.g. [Address Search])  
Black touch panel key:  
The button is operable.  
Gray touch panel key with white letters:  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Navigation Menu and Map Display  
This section describes the basic navigation op-  
erations, including how to display NAVI  
MENU and how to use Shortcut menu and  
the map screen.  
Info/Traffic menu  
How to Use Menu Screens  
There are two types of navigation menu: NAVI  
MENUand Shortcut menu.  
p The functions that cannot be used during  
the memory navi mode are indicated in  
gray with white letters. If you want to use  
such functions, insert the DVD Map Disc.  
Use this menu to check traffic information  
mainly using the GEX-P10XMT*.  
p [Traffic On Route], [Traffic Events], [Traf-  
fic Flow], [Stock Info], [Set My Favorites],  
and [My Favorites] can be used only when  
the GEX-P10XMT* is connected to the navi-  
gation system.  
GEX-P10XMT*:  
NAVI MENU  
XM Digital Satellite Data & Audio Receiver  
(sold separately). Traffic information only avail-  
able for cities where information is provided  
by XM NavTraffic service. Active subscription  
to XM NavTraffic is required to receive traffic  
information on the navigation system.  
p [Traffic On Route], [Traffic Events], and  
[Traffic Flow] can only be used in DVD navi  
mode.  
Use this menu for basic operation of your navi-  
gation system.  
1
With the map displayed, press MENU  
button.  
2
To change to the menu you want to  
use, touch the name of the menu displayed  
at the top of the screen.  
NAVI MENU is divided into four submenus:  
[Destination], [Info/Traffic], [Route Op-  
tions], [Settings].  
p Touch [AV MENU] changes to the AV opera-  
tion screen.  
Route Options menu  
Destination menu  
Used to specify the conditions for setting the  
route to the destination.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
p [Edit Current Route], [View Current  
Route] and [Recalculate] can be used  
when the route is set.  
Select the destination search method. The  
route also can be canceled from this menu.  
= About Searching places to register, refer  
to page 50 to 52.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Navigation Menu and Map Display  
03  
: Destination*  
Settings menu  
Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the  
route to the place specified with the scroll cur-  
sor.  
: Change Route*  
Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This  
item can be selected only during route gui-  
dance. You can add changes to your route and  
check it.  
Set the navigation functions so they can be  
used easily.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Chapter 6.  
3
If you want to return to the map, press  
MAP button.  
Shortcut menu  
Shortcuts allow you to perform various tasks,  
such as route calculation for the location indi-  
cated by the scroll cursor or registering a loca-  
tion in Address Book, faster than using NAVI  
MENU.  
p The shortcuts displayed onscreen can be  
changed. The shortcuts described here are  
those that can be selected with the system  
as default setting.  
: Vicinity Search  
Select a location with the scroll cursor. Nearby  
POIs (Points Of Interest) will also be found.  
: Registration  
Registers the location indicated by the scroll  
cursor to Address Book.  
p Touching [Registration] and selecting  
[Save] allows you to register the location to  
Address Book.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
p Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot  
be removed from Shortcut menu.  
%
When the map is displayed, briefly  
touch any part of the map.  
If you continue to touch the map, it will start  
scrolling.  
: Volume Setting  
The sound volume for the navigation can be  
set.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
: Menu Close  
Hides Shortcut menu.  
Shortcut menu  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Navigation Menu and Map Display  
How to view the map of the  
current location  
How to Use the Map  
Most of the information provided by your navi-  
gation system can be seen on the map. You  
need to get to know how the information that  
appears on the map.  
Map View  
Displays the standard map.  
1
a
8
Switching the current position  
screen display mode  
There are four types of map display and two  
additional view modes.  
2
7
g
3
4
b
!
!
!
!
!
!
Map View  
Drivers View  
5
c
9
h 6  
Guide View (during route guidance only)  
Route View (during route guidance only)  
Vehicle Dynamics  
Rear View (Only possible when [Camera]  
is set to [On])  
Drivers View  
Displays the map from the drivers viewpoint.  
1
a
8
p If you deviate from the route when the view  
mode is Route View or Guide View and  
enter a street not recorded on the disc, the  
screen changes to Map View. When you  
return to the route, the screen returns to  
the original view and resumes route gui-  
dance.  
2
f
7
g
9
4
b
3
5
h 6  
c
1
Press MAP button to display a map of  
the area around your current position.  
CAUTION  
2
3
Press MAP button again.  
In Drivers View, a small gauge with no scale is  
depicted, but is not intended to be used as a  
speedometer. Use the actual speedometer of your  
vehicle to confirm speed.  
Touch the mode name or press MAP  
button to select the mode you want to dis-  
play.  
p If the mode is selected by pressing MAP  
button, the screen automatically switches  
to the selected map display mode after 4  
seconds.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Navigation Menu and Map Display  
03  
Guide View  
Overlays two arrows onto the standard map  
(Map View).  
Rear View  
1
a
8
Rear view image is displayed on the left-hand  
side of the screen, while the map of your sur-  
roundings is indicated on the right.  
2
f
7
g
f
4
b
5
c
9
h 6  
3
Route View  
p If you touch the screen briefly, the screen  
changes Map View with Shortcut menu.  
If you close Shortcut menu the screen re-  
turns to Rear View.  
p If [Camera] is set to [Off], the rear view  
image is not displayed. Please set it to  
[On].  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
p When using a camera set to turn ON/OFF  
in conjunction with the reverse signal, no  
camera images will be displayed in rear  
view mode while you are moving forward.  
p To use Rear View, the camera must be  
set to always remain on. In that case, you  
should ask the camera maker or dealer  
whether the cameras functions or longev-  
ity would be affected.  
Displays the name of the street you will travel  
along next and an arrow indicating the direc-  
tion of travel.  
1
a
8
2
f
7
g
d
4
b
3
6
h
5
9
c
Vehicle Dynamics Display  
Indicates the status of your vehicle.  
p Rear View can be displayed at all times  
(e.g. when monitoring an attached trailer)  
as a split screen where map information is  
partially displayed. Please beware that in  
this setting, camera image is not resized to  
fit to screen, and that a portion of camera  
image may not be viewable.  
CAUTION  
In Vehicle Dynamics Display mode, the speed-  
ometer display may show a different speed than  
your vehicles actual speedometer, because your  
unit measures speed in a different way.  
p You can change the items indicated on the  
left and right meters.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
03  
Navigation Menu and Map Display  
Enlarged map of the intersection  
When [Close-up of Junction] in Settings  
menu is [On], an enlarged map of the junction  
appears. When driving on a freeway, a special  
guide illustration is displayed.  
Display items  
Guidance point*  
The next guidance point (next turning point,  
etc.) is shown by a yellow flag.  
Destination*  
A checker-flag indicates your destination.  
1 Name of the next street to be used (or  
next guidance point)*  
2 Distance to the guidance point*  
Touch to access the next information.  
e
d
3 Current location  
p The system cannot be changed to an en-  
larged intersection map in the following  
mode:  
The current location of your vehicle. The tip  
of the triangular mark indicates your head-  
ing and the display moves automatically as  
you drive.  
Drivers View  
Vehicle Dynamics  
4 Distance to the destination (or distance  
to way point)*  
Display during freeway driving  
In certain locations of the freeway, lane infor-  
mation is available, indicating the recom-  
mended lane to be in to easily maneuver the  
next guidance.  
If way points are set, the display changes  
with each touch. When two or more way  
points are set, the distance to the destina-  
tion and the distance to the next way point  
are switched.  
i
5 Name of the street your vehicle is tra-  
veling along (or City Name, etc.)  
6 Compass  
The red arrow indicates north. If the scale is  
less than 25 miles (50 km), touching the  
map changes the direction that it is dis-  
played in (north up/ heading up). When the  
scale of the map is greater than 25 miles  
(50 km), it is fixed to North up.  
While driving on the freeway, freeway exit  
numbers and freeway signs may be displayed  
when in the vicinity of interchanges and exits.  
!
Heading up:  
The map display always shows the vehi-  
cles direction as proceeding toward the  
top of the screen.  
j
k
!
North up:  
The map display always has north at the  
top of the screen.  
7 Zoom in/Zoom out  
Touch to change the maps scale.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Navigation Menu and Map Display  
03  
g Direction line*  
The direction towards your destination (or  
scroll cursor) is indicated with a straight  
line.  
8 Map scale  
The scale of the map is indicated by dis-  
tance.  
h Memory navi indicator  
9 TRAFFIC icon  
i Lane information*  
This appears when an XM tuner (GEX-  
P10XMT, sold separately) is connected, and  
traffic information is received.  
Lane information is displayed the first time  
there is a voice guidance on your route.  
When the guidance screen is displayed  
near an interchange or exit, the lane infor-  
mation disappears.  
a Current time  
b Estimated time of arrival (or travel time  
to your destination)*  
The display alternates by touching it.  
The estimated time of arrival is automati-  
cally calculated from Average Speed set  
and the actual average speed.  
j Freeway signs*  
These show the road number and give direc-  
tional information.  
k Freeway exit information*  
Displays the freeway exit.  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
p Information with the mark (*) appears only  
when the route is set.  
p Depending on the conditions and settings,  
some items may not be displayed.  
c Tracking mark  
The tracking mark shows the route your ve-  
hicle has traveled with dots.  
= For details, refer to Tracking Display on  
Changing the scale of the map  
Touching or allows you to change the  
map scale. Touch and holding or allows  
you to change the scale in smaller step within  
a range of 25 yards to 1 000 miles (25 meters  
to 2 000 kilometers). When the view mode is  
set to Map View or Guide View, Direct scale  
keyis displayed. Touching Direct scale key”  
changes the map to the selected scale di-  
rectly.  
d Map of your surroundings (Side map)  
Touching the map briefly shows Shortcut  
menu, while touching longer changes the  
map to Scroll mode.  
= For details, refer to Moving the map to  
e Distance to a turning point*  
Displayed on the enlarged intersection map.  
The green bar gets shorter as your vehicle  
approaches a turning point.  
f Next direction of travel*  
When you approach a guidance point, it ap-  
pears green.  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Navigation Menu and Map Display  
p In memory navi mode and/or when traver-  
sing an area not stored on the disc, selec-  
tion of the scales is limited.  
3
1
2
5
4
1 Scroll location  
Direct scale key  
The position of the scroll cursor shows the  
location selected on the current map.  
p When the scale is 0.25 mile (200 m) or  
lower, the road appears light blue in the  
vicinity of the scroll cursor.  
p The icon of a registered location and the  
traffic information icons are displayed  
when the map scale is 10 miles (20 km) or  
lower.  
p POI icons and the line for traffic congestion  
and traffic flow are displayed when the  
map scale is 0.75 mile (1 km) or lower.  
2 Direction line  
The direction towards the scroll cursor is in-  
dicated with a straight line.  
3 Distance from the current location  
The distance in a straight line between the  
location indicated by the scroll cursor and  
your current location.  
Moving the map to the location  
you want to see  
If you touch the display briefly, Shortcut  
menu appears.  
Touching anywhere on the map for at least  
2 seconds changes the map to Scroll mode  
and the map begins scrolling in the direction  
you touched. The scrolling stops when you re-  
lease your finger from the screen. At this time,  
the scroll cursor appears at the center of the  
screen. Also a line connecting between the  
current location and scroll cursor appears.  
Pressing MAP button returns you to the map  
of your surroundings.  
4 The street name, city name, area name  
and other information for this location.  
(The displayed information varies according  
to the scale.)  
Touching the on the right displays hidden  
text.  
5 Shortcut menu  
Viewing the information of a  
specified location  
An icon appears at registered places (home lo-  
cation, specific places, Address Book entries)  
and places where there is a POI icon or traffic  
information icon. Place the scroll cursor over  
the icon to view detailed information.  
p Touch the area close to the center of the  
screen to scroll slowly. Touch near the  
sides of the screen to scroll quickly.  
1
Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-  
sor to the icon you want to view.  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Navigation Menu and Map Display  
03  
2
Touch  
.
When appears to the right of the list  
You can also set a destination by touching  
to the right of the destination list such as Ad-  
dress Book. Touch [OK] to confirm. The loca-  
tion indicated by the scroll cursor will be set  
as a destination.  
Information for a specified location appears.  
The displayed information varies according to  
the location. (There may be no information for  
that location.)  
= For details, refer to Editing Registered Loca-  
= For details, refer to Displaying Certain POI  
= For details, refer to Confirming traffic infor-  
Scroll:  
The map display changes to Shortcut menu.  
If you touch anywhere on the map, the map  
display changes to Scroll mode.  
3
Touch [Back].  
You are returned to the previous display.  
p In the memory navi mode, you can only see  
detailed information for registered points  
(when available).  
Finding a destination on the map  
If you search the location you want to visit by  
scrolling the map, touch  
in Shortcut  
menu to specify your destination on the map.  
1
Press MAP button to access the map  
screen.  
2
Touch the map for at least 2 seconds.  
The map display changes to Scroll mode.  
3
Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-  
sor to the place you want to make your  
destination.  
= For details, refer to Moving the map to the  
4
Touch  
.
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
3
Touch [Category].  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions  
Category  
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.  
To enable these functions, you must stop in a  
safe place and put on the parking brake before  
setting your route (refer to Parking brake interlock  
p Some information on traffic regulations de-  
pends on the time when the route calcula-  
Name:  
tion is performed. Thus, the information  
may not correspond with a certain traffic  
regulation when your vehicle actually  
passes the location. Also, the information  
on the traffic regulations provided will be  
for a passenger vehicle, and not for a truck  
or other delivery vehicles. Always follow the  
actual traffic regulations when driving.  
p If you press MENU button during route cal-  
culation, the calculation is canceled and  
the map display appears.  
Touch if you wish to first specify the POI  
Name.  
City:  
Touch if you wish to first specify the destina-  
tion city or area.  
4
Touch the desired category.  
p Inserting the DVD Map Disc will cause a  
forced reroute. (This rerouting cannot be  
canceled.)  
If the category is not sub-divided into more de-  
tailed categories, the list will not be displayed.  
Proceed to Step 6.  
Finding Your Destination by  
Selecting the Type of Facility  
5
Touch the subcategory.  
Information about various facilities (Points Of  
Interest - POI), such as gas stations, amuse-  
ment parks or restaurants, is available. By se-  
lecting the category (or entering the POI  
Name), you can search for a POI.  
6
Input the name of the POI.  
If the list does not automatically appear when  
the name of the POI has been entered, try  
touching [OK].  
City:  
Touch to specify the destination city or area.  
p If less than six POIs in a subcategory are  
available, the screen for inputting the POI  
name is skipped.  
Searching for Points of Interest  
(POI)  
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [POI Search].  
7
Touch POI for your destination.  
p Touching displays a map of the sur-  
roundings of the selected POI.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch the zone code key of the destina-  
tion and touch [OK].  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
04  
3
Touch [OK].  
Finding a POI in your surroundings  
Names of POIs and their distance from your  
current location appear. They are listed in  
order from nearest to farthest.  
You can search for Points Of Interest in your  
surroundings on the map. Use it to find a POI  
to visit during a journey.  
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [Vicinity Search].  
2
Touch the desired category.  
Category  
Distance to the facility  
p When you touch , the POIs around the  
specified location are shown on a map.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
The selected category will have a red check  
mark.  
p Searching range is approximately 10 miles  
(16 km) square from the current location.  
OK:  
Starts searching.  
Searching the facilities around  
the scroll cursor  
Back:  
Returns to the previous screen.  
1
Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-  
Set:  
sor to the place where you want to search  
for POI.  
Display the screen for registering POI short-  
cuts.  
2
Touch  
.
ingsfor the following operations.  
p If you touch one of the POI shortcuts (e.g.  
), you can start searching POI directly for  
the selected category on the POI shortcut.  
p If you want to search for facilities by using  
both marked category and POI shortcuts,  
select some categories in the list and then  
touch the POI shortcut to start searching.  
p If you want to search with more detailed ca-  
tegories, touch . When the subcategory  
list appears, touch the item and touch  
[Back]. When only a few types of the de-  
tailed categories are selected, blue check  
marks will appear.  
p This can be used when setting Vicinity  
Search icon to display as a shortcut on the  
map screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
p The distance indicated in the search result  
is the distance from the scroll cursor to the  
facility.  
p The bottom icons are for shortcuts to your  
favorite categories. Touching a shortcut  
icon displays a list of the facilities in the ca-  
tegory.  
p You can select from the detailed category  
for up to 100 items.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
p [Vicinity Search] in NAVI MENU searches  
1
Touch [Destination] in the NAVI MENU,  
your surroundings. On the other hand,  
and then touch [Telephone Search].  
when using  
Page 43), the area around the scroll cursor  
will be searched.  
in Shortcut menu ( d  
2
Input a telephone number.  
p If there is more than one place for the num-  
ber input, a list of those places is displayed.  
Touch the item you want in the list.  
Setting an Entrance or Exit of  
a Freeway as Your Destination  
You can set the entrance or exit of a freeway  
as your destination.  
3
If the displayed place is satisfactory,  
touch [OK].  
Touching [Scroll] changes the destination.  
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [Freeway Search].  
Route Calculation to Your  
Home Location or to Your  
Favorite Location  
If your home location is registered, the route  
home can be calculated by a single touch of  
the touch key from Destination menu. Also,  
you can register one location, such as your  
workplace, as your favorite location, and the  
route is calculated in a similar way.  
2
Touch the zone code key of the destina-  
tion and touch [OK].  
3
Enter the name of the freeway and  
touch [OK].  
4
Touch the freeway.  
The display for selecting your destination to  
the entrance or to the exit of the freeway ap-  
pears.  
%
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and  
5
Touch [Entrance] or [Exit].  
then touch [Return Home] or [Go to].  
The list of entrances to, or exits from, the se-  
lected freeway appears.  
6
Touch your destination.  
p You can also see the destination by touch-  
ing the  
on the right of the list.  
Selecting Destination from  
Destination Historyand  
Address Book”  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Any place that has been searched before is  
stored in [Destination History]. Places that  
you have registered manually, such as your  
home, are stored in [Address Book]. Simply  
select the place you want to go to from the list  
and a route to that place will be calculated.  
= For information on Address Book, refer to  
Chapter 5.  
Searching for Your  
Destination by Specifying  
the Telephone Number  
If you know the telephone number of your des-  
tination, you can quickly search for your desti-  
nation by specifying the telephone number.  
= For information on Destination History,  
refer to Chapter 5.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
04  
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and  
No:  
then touch [Address Book] or [Destination  
History].  
Returns to the previous display without delet-  
ing the route.  
p You can also cancel the route using  
2
Touch your destination name.  
Change Route in Shortcut menu.  
Checking the Set Route  
You can check information about the route be-  
tween your current location and your destina-  
tion.  
You can select from the following methods:  
checking the shape of the route by scrolling  
the map along the route, checking the passing  
streets with a list, and checking the entire dis-  
tance of the route in a single screen.  
Route calculation starts.  
p You can also see the destination by touch-  
ing  
on the right of the list.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Checking the set route with the  
map  
Canceling the Route Guidance  
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,  
If you no longer need to travel to your destina-  
tion or if you want to change your destination,  
follow the steps below to cancel the route gui-  
dance.  
then touch [View Current Route].  
p [View Current Route] is active only when  
the route is set.  
p You can also see the location by touching  
the  
on the right of the list.  
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU,  
then touch [Cancel Route].  
2
Touch [Scroll].  
The message confirming whether to cancel  
the current route appears.  
The screen for selecting the point to start  
scrolling appears.  
2
Touch [Yes (all)].  
3
Touch the point to start scrolling.  
1
3
2
The current route is deleted, and a map of  
your surroundings reappears.  
You can select the following items:  
1 Starting Point  
Yes (one):  
Route is recalculated by canceling the se-  
lected way point.  
2 Way Point (If this is set)  
3 Destination  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
p If there are multiple way points, selecting  
[Way Point] displays a list of the way points  
on the route. Touch the place you want to  
start scrolling from.  
Name of the streets you are driving through  
4
Touch  
To continue scrolling after you release your fin-  
ger, touch and hold or . If neces-  
or  
to scroll the map.  
sary, the scale of the map can be changed.  
Driving distance  
Current Route  
4
Touch [Back].  
You can return to the previous display.  
p When a long distance route is calculated,  
your navigation system may not be able to  
list all the roads. (In this case, the remain-  
ing roads will be shown in the list as you  
drive on.)  
Scroll Cursor  
Map:  
Checking the entire route overview  
You can check the entire shape of the current  
route.  
p When [View Current Route] is selected  
during the memory navi mode, the informa-  
tion is displayed up to the location where  
the route is in memory.  
The scroll screen is displayed.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
5
Touch [Back].  
You can return to the previous display.  
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,  
then touch [View Current Route].  
p [View Current Route] is active only when  
the route is set.  
p You can also see the location by touching  
on the right of the list.  
Checking the set route by text  
This function is not available if your vehicle  
has deviated from the set route.  
p When [Profile] is selected during the mem-  
ory navi mode, information is displayed up  
to the location where the route is stored in  
memory.  
2
Touch [Overview].  
A map of the whole route up to the destination  
is displayed.  
p You can also check the overview by using  
Shortcut menu if [Whole Route Over-  
view] is selected on [Short-Cut Selection].  
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,  
then touch [View Current Route].  
p [View Current Route] is active only when  
the route is set.  
p You can also see the location by touching  
on the right of the list.  
Checking the set route from  
Shortcut menu  
You can also check the information about the  
set route from Shortcut menu.  
2
3
Touch [Profile].  
Check the contents on the display.  
Scroll the list as necessary.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
04  
1
Touch the map screen.  
3
Touch the distance from the list.  
Shortcut menu appears.  
2
3
Touch  
.
Touch [Route Profile] or [Route Scroll].  
= About Route Profile, refer to Checking  
= About Route Scroll, refer to Checking the  
Detour distance  
Searches detours for a specified distance in  
the route ahead of your current position. After  
the route is calculated, the map screen shows  
your surroundings and route guidance is re-  
sumed.  
4
Touch [Back].  
You can return to the previous display.  
Recalculating the Route to  
Your Destination  
You can set the length of the area, avoid just a  
certain area, or you can even search a new  
route from the current location to your desti-  
nation.  
Editing Way Points to the  
Current Route  
You can select way points (locations you want  
to visit on the way to your destination) and you  
can recalculate the route to pass through  
these locations.  
Recalculating the route  
%
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,  
and then touch [Recalculate].  
This option automatically searches the route  
to the destination again.  
Editing a way point  
Up to 5 way points can be selected, and se-  
lected points can be sorted automatically or  
manually.  
p [Edit Current Route] is active only when  
the route is set.  
p [Recalculate] is active only when the route  
is set.  
p You can also recalculate (Reroute) your  
route using  
Change Route in Shortcut  
menu.  
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,  
and then touch [Edit Current Route].  
Recalculating a specified  
distance in the route ahead of  
your current position  
2
Select editing method.  
1
Touch the map screen.  
Shortcut menu appears.  
2
Touch  
.
p You can also see the location by touching  
on the right of the list.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
Add:  
2
3
Touch  
.
Switch the display to search for points. After  
searching for a point, display it on a map, then  
touch [OK] to add to the way points. (You can  
add up to 5 way points in total.)  
Touch [Skip Way Point].  
A message asking whether you want to skip  
the next way point appears.  
Delete:  
4
Touch [Yes].  
You can delete way points from the list. (You  
can delete way points successively.)  
A new route to your destination through all the  
remaining way points, except for the skipped  
way point, is calculated.  
Sort:  
Touch to display a screen listing the way  
points. Touching  
or  
on the left of the list  
allows you to sort the way points manually.  
Setting Areas to Avoid  
If you register Designate Areas to Avoid,  
such as crowded intersections or congested  
areas, routes can be calculated that avoid  
those areas.  
Registering an area to avoid  
Automatic:  
This section describes how to register an Area  
to Avoid for the first time. You can register up  
to five Areas to Avoid.  
You can sort the destination and way points  
automatically. The system will show the near-  
est way point (distance in a straight line) from  
the current location as way point 1, and sort  
the other points (including your destination) in  
order of distance from your current location.  
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,  
then touch [Designate Areas to Avoid].  
2
3
Touch [Yes].  
Original:  
Select one of the items shown in [New  
Returns to the original order.  
Select from manual order, [Automatic] or  
[Original] and touch [Done] to start the route  
search.  
Area].  
When registering for the first time, any item  
on the list is shown as [New Area].  
3
Touch [Done].  
p If you set a way point(s) in the route to your  
destination, the route up to the next way  
point will appear light green. The rest of the  
route will be light blue.  
Skipping a way point  
4
Select the place to register and display  
If the points are set, the next way point along  
the route can be skipped.  
the map.  
= About Searching places to register, refer  
to page 50 to 52.  
Once a search is complete, a map with the  
specified location at its center appears.  
1
Touch the map screen.  
Shortcut menu appears.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
04  
p If you select [Map Search], move the scroll  
cursor to the place you want to set and  
touch [OK].  
3
Select the desired operation.  
5
Change the map scale and decide the  
size of the Area to Avoid.  
The Area to avoid is enclosed in a red frame.  
You can also change the map scale though  
the maximum map scale for registering Areas  
to Avoid is 0.1 mile (100 m).  
Rename:  
Changes the name. Enter the new name and  
touch [OK]. This returns you to Route Op-  
tions menu.  
6
Scroll the map, adjust the position of  
the red frame, and touch [OK].  
Change:  
A specified area can be changed. For the next  
steps, refer to Step 3 in Registering an area to  
Delete:  
Delete the selected Area to Avoid.  
If you want to stop registration, touch [Back].  
p Depending on the setting of route search  
conditions, you may not be able to avoid  
the specified areas. A confirmation mes-  
sage is displayed on the screen at this time.  
= For details, refer to Modifying the Route Cal-  
Displaying Certain POI on  
the Map  
POI in a certain category can be shown on the  
map, and you can check the location on the  
display.  
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, then  
Changing or deleting an area to  
avoid  
You can subsequently change/rename/delete  
an Area to Avoid.  
touch [Overlay POI].  
2
play.  
Touch the category you want to dis-  
The selected item is marked. If you want to se-  
lect other categories, repeat this step.  
p If you want to display more detailed cate-  
gories, touch . When the subcategory list  
appears, touch the item you want to display  
and touch [Back].  
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU,  
then touch [Designate Areas to Avoid].  
2
Select the area you want to change or  
delete.  
p When some sub-categories are selected,  
the corresponding category is marked blue.  
When all the sub-categories within a cate-  
gory are selected, that category is marked  
red.  
p You can use up to 100 categories of the de-  
tailed categories for [Overlay POI].  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
p If you touch one of the POI shortcuts (e.g.  
), you can start searching for POI directly  
in the selected category on the POI short-  
cut.  
4
Touch category or  
.
3
Press MAP button.  
POIs in the selected category appear on the  
map.  
p You can also display POI by using Shortcut  
menu if [Overlay POI] is selected on  
[Short-Cut Selection].  
Touching a category adds that category to the  
shortcuts.  
5
Touch subcategory.  
The selected category is added to the list of  
POI.  
When registering another icon, repeat step 3  
through step 5.  
p You can register a POI shortcut by touching  
[Overlay POI] under [Info/Traffic] in NAVI  
MENU, or by touching the icons such as  
and in Shortcut menu. The steps for  
registration are the same as described  
above.  
Registering/deleting POI  
Shortcuts  
You can register up to six shortcuts to your fa-  
vorite POI. You can also change or delete the  
registered shortcuts.  
Registering a POI shortcut  
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [Vicinity Search].  
Deleting a POI shortcut  
2
Touch [Set].  
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [Vicinity Search].  
p You can also touch  
in Shortcut menu or  
[Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, then touch  
[Overlay POI].  
2
3
Touch [Set].  
Touch [Delete].  
Displays a list of already registered POI short-  
cuts.  
Displays a list of already registered POI short-  
cuts.  
3
Touch [Add].  
4
Touch the category to be deleted.  
A red check appears on the selected shortcut.  
All:  
A red check will appear on all registered cate-  
gories.  
5
Touch [Delete].  
Deletes the selected shortcut from the list.  
Displays a POI category list.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
04  
Recalculate  
Automatically searches the route to the desti-  
nation again.  
Modifying the Route  
Calculation Conditions  
You can change the route calculation condi-  
tions using Route Options menu. The follow-  
ing description features an example of  
changing the number of routes to be  
searched.  
p [Recalculate] is displayed only when the  
route is set.  
Number of Routes  
This setting controls whether the system  
should calculate only one route, or several  
routes.  
1
Touch [Route Options] in NAVI MENU.  
2
Touch [Number of Routes].  
1*:  
The current settings appear under the name of  
the item. Each time you touch the item, the  
setting changes. Repeatedly touch the item  
until the value you want to set appears.  
Only one route judged as being optimum by  
your navigation system is calculated.  
Multiple:  
Several route options are calculated (maxi-  
mum 6 routes).  
Route Condition  
This setting controls whether the route should  
be calculated by taking into account the time  
or the distance.  
Fast*:  
Calculate a route with the shortest travel time  
to your destination as a priority.  
Items that users can operate  
This section describes the details of the each  
item. Settings marked with an asterisk (*)  
show that they are default or factory settings.  
Short:  
Calculate a route with the shortest distance to  
your destination as a priority.  
Edit Current Route  
Avoid Freeway  
This displays a screen for adding or deleting  
way points. The method is the same as de-  
Route.  
p [Edit Current Route] is displayed only  
when the route is set.  
This setting controls whether freeways may be  
included in the road calculation. (A route  
using a freeway may be calculated in some  
cases, such as when setting your destination  
far away.)  
On:  
Calculate a route that avoids freeways.  
Off*:  
View Current Route  
Calculate a route that may include freeways.  
= For details, refer to Checking the set route  
= For details, refer to Checking the set route  
Avoid Ferry  
This setting controls whether ferry crossings  
should be taken into account.  
On:  
= For details, refer to Checking the entire  
Calculate a route that avoids ferries.  
Off*:  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
Calculate a route that may include ferries.  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
cludes ferries even if [On] is selected.  
3
Touch [Next] to change the displayed  
route.  
Avoid Toll Road  
This setting controls whether toll roads (in-  
cluding toll areas) should be taken into ac-  
count.  
On:  
Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (includ-  
ing toll areas).  
1
3
2
The following information is displayed on this  
screen:  
Off*:  
Calculate a route that may include toll roads  
(including toll areas).  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
cludes toll roads even if [On] is selected.  
1 Route calculation condition  
Displays the conditions set by Route Op-  
tions menu by icon.  
!
!
!
Use/avoid freeway  
Use/avoid toll road  
Use/avoid ferry  
Designate Areas to Avoid  
Displays the inability to fulfill the conditions  
by icon.  
Perform the route calculation  
for several route options, and  
select one  
You can get route calculations for several  
route options. After route options are calcu-  
lated, select the one you want.  
!
!
Pass through Area to Avoid  
Use toll road although the setting  
[Avoid Toll Road] is [On].  
Use Ferry although the setting [Avoid  
Ferry] is [On].  
!
2 Distance to your destination  
3 Travel time to your destination  
p [Avoid Freeway] setting may not be re-  
flected, depending on the distance to the  
destination.  
p You can see other places while displaying a  
possible route by scrolling the map.  
Touching [Next] moves the next candidate  
route to the center and indicates the map.  
1
Set [Number of Routes] to [Multiple].  
= For details, refer to Modifying the Route Cal-  
2
Search your destination and set the  
route.  
Calculated routes are shown in different colors  
(from two to six routes).  
4
Touch [Information] to check the infor-  
mation on the selected route.  
You can also check details of the roads along  
the selected route. (If you touch [Back], you  
can return to the previous display.)  
= About Route Scroll, refer to Checking the  
= About Route Profile, refer to Checking  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Setting a Route to Your Destination  
04  
p After the route is calculated, it may take  
some time until the detailed route informa-  
tion (Route Profile) is displayed.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The route you selected is accepted, and the  
map of your surroundings appears. When you  
start driving, the route guidance begins.  
p If the above operations are not performed  
within 30 seconds after the route calcula-  
tion is completed and you have already  
started your vehicle, the route selected at  
the time is automatically chosen.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
05  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these  
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-  
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in  
a safe place and apply the parking brake (refer to  
p The items already registered under [Return  
Home] or [Go to] can be modified.  
Editing Registered Locations  
3
Search for a location to register.  
Address Book can store up to 300 registered  
locations. These can include home location,  
favorite places and destinations you have al-  
ready registered. This registered location infor-  
mation can also be modified. Also, routes to  
registered locations can be calculated by  
touching the screen. Registering places you  
visit frequently saves time and effort.  
You can select a method of location search on  
the display.  
= For more details about Address Search,  
= About Searching places to register, refer  
to page 50 to 52.  
p If you select [Map Search], move the scroll  
cursor to the location you want to set and  
touch [OK].  
p Address Book is automatically updated in  
alphabetic order. However, [Return Home]  
and [Go to] always appear at the top.  
4
Point the scroll cursor to the location  
you want to register and touch [OK].  
Registering your home and  
your favorite location  
5
Touch [Save].  
Completes the registration.  
Of 300 registered locations that can be stored,  
home location and favorite locations can be  
stored separately in Address Book. Register-  
ing your favorite location for the first time is  
described here. You can change the registered  
information later. You might find it useful to  
register your workplace or a relatives home as  
your favorite location.  
Registering a previous location  
in Address Book  
Once a destination or way point is searched, it  
is automatically retained and stored in Desti-  
nation History. If a search is canceled while  
still in progress, only the places where the  
map was displayed and scrolled through or  
places where Shortcut menu was displayed  
are retained and stored. Note that after 100  
places are stored, new places are automati-  
cally overwritten on top of old ones, in order  
from oldest to most recent. Therefore, to en-  
sure that certain places are kept and not over-  
written, be sure to register them in Address  
Book.  
Map icons:  
:
Home location icon  
:
Favorite location icon  
1
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU, then  
touch [Defined Locations].  
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU,  
2
Touch [Set Go To].  
then touch [Destination History].  
When registering your home location, touch  
[Set Home].  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
05  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch on the right-hand side of the  
place you want to register in Address  
Book.  
Add:  
The screen for selecting the method for regis-  
tering the location in Address Book appears.  
= For more details about Address Search,  
= About Searching places to register, refer  
to page 50 to 52.  
p If you select [Map Search], move the scroll  
cursor to the place you want to set and  
touch [OK].  
:
The map of that place can be displayed.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
3
Touch [Edit Information].  
3
4
Touch [Registration].  
Touch [Save].  
Registration is now complete.  
p If you want to stop registration, touch  
[Back].  
= For more information, refer to Editing a loca-  
The Address Information menu appears. Refer  
to the item corresponding to the subsequent  
operation. After finishing the operation, Ad-  
dress Book menu appears. You can continue  
to edit other information items if necessary.  
Editing a locations information  
In Address Book menu, touching on the  
right-hand side of the place displays Address  
Book Operate menu.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
To edit the information about the location:  
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU,  
then touch [Address Book].  
2
Touch on the right-hand side of the  
1 Name  
place whose information you want to edit.  
You can enter the desired name.  
2 Name (2nd line)  
The name of the city appears in this column  
(Not editable).  
3 Phone number  
You can search by registered telephone  
number.  
:
4 Pictograph  
The map of that place can be displayed.  
The symbol displayed on the map.  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
05  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
5 Sound  
2
Select the sound.  
The selected operating sound is played.  
6 Modify Location  
The Address Information menu appears.  
p If you want to hear the operating sound,  
You can change the registered location by  
scrolling the map.  
touch  
.
Modify the location  
4
Touch [Save].  
= For details, refer to Changing the position of  
Completes the registration.  
Changing a name  
1
Touch [Edit Name].  
Deleting Address Book or  
Destination History information  
Items registered in Address Book or Destina-  
tion History can be deleted. All entries of the  
data in Address Book or Destination History  
can be deleted at once.  
2
Enter a new name; touch [OK].  
The name of the current location appears in  
the text box. Delete the current name, and  
enter a new name between 1 and 23 charac-  
ters long.  
3
Touch [Save].  
1
Touch [Destination] in NAVI MENU,  
The details you set are registered.  
then touch [Address Book].  
To delete items in Destination History, touch  
[Destination History].  
p You cannot change the name of your home.  
Entering or changing a phone number  
2
Touch on the right-hand side of the  
1
Touch [Edit Phone Number].  
place you want to delete.  
2
Input a phone number and touch [OK].  
3
Select the deletion method.  
The Address Information menu appears.  
p To change a registered phone number, de-  
lete the existing number and then enter a  
new one.  
Selecting a pictograph to appear on  
the map  
1
Touch [Select Image].  
Delete This Item:  
Delete the location selected.  
2
Touch the Pictograph to appear on the  
Delete All Address Book Entries (or Delete  
All Destinations):  
Delete all Address Book or Destination His-  
tory data.  
map.  
The Address Information menu appears.  
p You cannot change the mark of your home  
and your favorite location.  
4
Select [Yes].  
Selecting sound  
The data you selected is deleted.  
Alternative option:  
1
Touch [Select Sound].  
No:  
The display shown in Step 3 appears.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
05  
p Because deleted data cannot be restored,  
take extra care not to select [Delete All Ad-  
dress Book Entries] and [Delete All Desti-  
nations] by mistake.  
computer. Then use the personal computer  
to store POINT folder in the first level of a  
CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW.  
1
2
Insert a disc to the disc loading slot.  
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU, then  
touch [System Options].  
Changing the position of locations  
registered in Address Book  
You can select a location registered in Ad-  
dress Book, display a map of its surroundings  
and change its position.  
3
Touch [Read from Disc].  
The list of groups appears.  
4
Touch the desired group.  
1
In Address Book menu, touch on the  
5
Touch the desired locations.  
right-hand side of the place whose position  
you want to change.  
Selected locations are marked. To load the  
data from other locations, repeat this step.  
Alternative option:  
2
Touch [Edit Information], and then  
touch [Modify Location].  
The map of the selected area and its surround-  
ings appears.  
All:  
All the locations are selected (or canceled) at  
once.  
3
Touch the display to change its posi-  
6
Touch [OK].  
tion, then touch [OK].  
The data of the selected locations is stored in  
Address Book.  
4
Touch [Save].  
The position is changed.  
Loading registered locations  
data from a Disc  
Address Book data stored on a CD-R/-RW  
and DVD-R/-RW can be loaded to the naviga-  
tion system.  
This function is used when moving Address  
Book data from a Pioneer navigation system  
with a PC card slot (e.g., AVIC-900DVD) to a  
Pioneer navigation system without a PC card  
slot.  
p When moving data, copy the folder named  
POINTfrom the PC card to a personal  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
05  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
2
Touch or to view the incident list.  
Using XM NavTraffic  
Information  
Places (street names) where incidents have  
occurred are displayed in the list.  
If you have a GEX-P10XMT XM Digital Satellite  
Data & Audio Receiver (sold separately) at-  
tached to the navigation system, and have an  
active subscription to XM NavTraffic service,  
you can view current traffic conditions and in-  
formation on your navigation display. When  
the unit receives updated traffic information,  
the navigation system will overlay the traffic in-  
formation on your map, and also display de-  
tailed text information when available. When  
you are traveling along a route and there is  
traffic information on your current route, the  
system will automatically detect it, and ask  
you if you would like to be rerouted. (In such  
case, route calculation takes into considera-  
tion about 90 mile radius of alternative routes  
and its traffic conditions from your current lo-  
cation).  
1
2
4
5
3
1 Street or place name  
2 Direction  
3 Incident  
4 Distance to the location  
5 The incident numbers currently dis-  
played and the total number of inci-  
dents  
p The incidents that have already been read  
will be displayed in letters with a white out-  
line. Unread incidents will be in white.  
p The term traffic congestionin this section  
indicated the following types of traffic infor-  
mation: stop and go, stopped traffic and  
closed/ blocked roads. This information is  
always taken into consideration when  
p Touching  
allows you to check the place  
on a map. (Traffic information without posi-  
tional information cannot be checked on a  
map.)  
checking your route, and the information  
related with these events cannot be turned  
off. Additionally, the system also takes into  
consideration the traffic flow information if  
[Use traffic flow information] is [On].  
:
You can sort the traffic information in alphabe-  
tical order.  
:
You can sort the traffic information according  
to the incident.  
Viewing traffic list  
:
Traffic Information is displayed onscreen in a  
list. This allows you to check how many traffic  
incidents have occurred, their location and  
their distance from your current position.  
You can sort the traffic information by distance  
from your current position.  
:
When new traffic information is received, cur-  
rent information is changed or old information  
has been removed, the list is updated to reflect  
the new situation.  
Checking all traffic information  
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in [NAVI MENU],  
then touch [Traffic Events].  
The list with received traffic information is  
shown.  
3
Select an incident you want to view in  
detail.  
The details of the selected incident are dis-  
played.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
05  
p Touching an incident you want to see allows  
you to view the detailed information of the  
incident. If the information cannot be dis-  
played on one screen, touch or to view  
the remaining information.  
p When  
is displayed, the data is  
being loaded from the DVD Map Disc.  
2 A line to indicate the length of the traffic  
congestion  
Displayed only when the scale on the map is  
0.75 mile (1km) or lower.  
Traffic congestion:  
Orange with white outline: stop and go traf-  
fic  
4
Touch [Back] to return to the list with  
traffic information.  
A list with traffic information appears again.  
Red with white outline: stopped traffic  
Black with white outline: closed/blocked  
roads  
Checking traffic information on the  
route  
%
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and  
3 Icon for traffic information  
then touch [Traffic On Route].  
The currently set traffic information on the  
route appears on the screen.  
Appears only when the scale on the map is  
10 miles (20 km) or lower.  
If you want to check the traffic information de-  
tails, move the scroll cursor onto the icon,  
such as , and touch . This allows you to  
view place names and other information.  
p The method for checking the content dis-  
played on the screen is the same for  
Confirming traffic information  
on the map  
Information on avoiding traffic  
congestion on route ahead  
The traffic-related information displayed on  
the map is as follows.  
If you are approaching traffic on your current  
route, the navigation system has the ability to  
recommend an alternative route. Depending  
on the information of traffic congestion you  
have received and the setting of Use traffic  
flow information, the navigation system will re-  
commend an alternate route automatically.  
On the freeway, the navigation system will de-  
tect at least 1.6 miles (2.6 km) ahead of the  
specific traffic incident.  
3
2
1
If a better route can be calculated, the follow-  
ing screen will appear.  
p The following types of traffic incidents on  
the route will be checked: stop and go,  
stopped traffic and closed/blocked roads.  
(or  
,
):  
1 TRAFFIC icon  
When a route has been calculated, touch to  
check whether there is any traffic congestion  
information on your route. When no route has  
been calculated, touch to display the traffic  
list.  
p When  
is displayed, reading from  
the DVD Map Disc is required. Please  
insert the DVD Map Disc.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
05  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
Distance from the current position of your vehicle to  
the point of entry into the new route  
If there is a traffic congestion  
information on the route  
When receiving information about a traffic  
congestion, the message announcing the pre-  
sence of a traffic congestion is indicated.  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
Yes:  
The route is recalculated taking the traffic con-  
gestion into account.  
Difference in distance and travel time between existing  
route and new route  
No:  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
The message disappears, and the map display  
reappears.  
New:  
List:  
A new route is displayed on the screen.  
The list with traffic information is displayed.  
p In the memory navi mode, you can only se-  
lect [No].  
Current:  
The current route is displayed on the screen.  
OK:  
If there is no traffic congestion  
information on the route  
If there is no traffic congestion information, a  
message appears to inform you that there is  
no traffic congestion information on the route  
that is shown.  
Select the route that is displayed on the  
screen.  
p When no selection is made, the current  
route will be automatically selected after a  
short while.  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
When checking traffic congestion  
information manually  
List:  
Touching  
on the screen allows you to  
The list with all traffic information is displayed.  
check for traffic congestion information on  
your route. If there is any information about a  
traffic congestion on your route, a message  
appears asking you whether to search for an-  
other route to avoid the traffic congestion. If  
there is no traffic congestion information  
along the route being guided, it is announced  
on screen and by voice.  
Back:  
The message disappears, and the screen re-  
turns to the map screen.  
p In the memory navi mode, you can only se-  
lect [Back].  
p The following types of traffic incidents on  
the route will be checked: stop and go,  
stopped traffic and closed/blocked roads.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
Traffic flow information  
When the map scale is between 0.02 mile  
(25 m) to 0.75 mile (1 km), red, yellow, or green  
blinking lines may appear on either side of a  
road. These colors indicate the average speed  
at which traffic is flowing along these streets.  
Here is a guide to the colors and the average  
speed they indicate:  
05  
%
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, then  
touch [Traffic Flow].  
You can use instead of  
in the traf-  
fic events list screen. The list with the traffic  
flow information is shown.  
The list will be sorted according to the average  
speed by touching  
.
The line for traffic flow  
Selecting traffic information to  
display  
There are different types of traffic information  
that can be received via the XM NavTraffic ser-  
vice, and you can select which types will be in-  
corporated and displayed on your navigation  
system.  
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [Traffic Settings].  
Flow Icon  
The icon for the traffic information currently  
being displayed appears on the screen.  
Red: average speed in this area is between  
5 mph to 15 mph (8 km/h to 24 km/h)  
Yellow: average speed in this area is between  
20 mph to 40 mph (32 km/h to 64 km/h)  
Green: average speed in this area is 45 mph  
(72 km/h) or faster (An icon without a number  
indicates the average speed of the road is  
more than 70 mph (112 km/h))  
2
Touch [Change].  
The names of the displayed traffic information  
items and a list of icons appears on the  
screen.  
p In addition to these blinking lines, a round  
icon with a number may appear on the  
map. The number in the icon indicates the  
actual average speed of that specific area.  
p The flow icon appears only when the scale  
on the map is 10 miles (20 km) or lower.  
p You can turn off the use of Traffic flow infor-  
mation.  
3
Touch the traffic information item to  
display.  
A red check appears next to the selected traf-  
fic information.  
Checking traffic flow information on  
the list  
The traffic flow information on the route can  
also be displayed as an onscreen list.  
p The method for checking the traffic flow in-  
formation displayed on the screen is the  
p Touching [All] selects all the traffic informa-  
tion.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
05  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
p Touch [Back] to not add the selected traffic  
Displaying stock prices  
This navigation system can display the prices  
of up to 12 stocks.  
information.  
4
Touch [Done].  
The selected traffic information icon is added  
to the screen.  
p The following types of traffic congestion  
cannot be deselected and are always dis-  
played: stop and go, stopped traffic, and  
closed/blocked roads.  
%
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [Stock Info].  
5
Touch [Back].  
Set use of Traffic flow information  
setting to off  
The screen displays a list of stock prices.  
p Although the stock price information dis-  
played onscreen is updated every 30 sec-  
onds (approx.), these prices are not real-  
time values.  
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [Traffic Settings].  
2
Touch [On].  
Registering stocks to be displayed  
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [Stock Info].  
2
Touch [Add].  
The button changes to [Off].  
3
Touch [Back].  
p If you wish to use the traffic flow informa-  
tion again, touch [Off] to turn the button  
[On] in Traffic Settings screen.  
3
Input the Ticker text for the stocks you  
wish to display, then touch [OK].  
Using the XM Tuner to View  
Stock, Sports, and Other  
Information  
When an XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is con-  
nected, you can receive stock price, sports,  
and other information, and display it onscreen.  
You may also register favorite information on  
the navigation system.  
Punc.:  
You can input punctuation such as !and :.  
Oper.:  
You can input operators such as +and “–”.  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
05  
p The method for inputting the text is the  
same as for inputting street names.  
2
Touch the category you want to browse  
from the list.  
p If the input ticker symbol does not match  
the actual ticker symbol for the stock com-  
pletely, you may not be able to find it.  
Deleting stocks to be displayed onscreen  
This navigation system can display the prices  
of up to 12 stocks. If 12 stocks are already re-  
gistered, delete as many entries as necessary  
to add new stocks.  
3
Touch an item you wish to store.  
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [Stock Info].  
2
3
Touch [Delete].  
Touch the ticker of the stock you wish  
If an item is divided into more detail cate-  
gories, select the one from the list to narrow  
down the category. After narrowing down, the  
message confirming whether or not to register  
the item will appear.  
to delete.  
A red check appears next to the ticker you  
touched.  
p To delete all the registered stocks, touch  
[All]. Red checks will appear next to all the  
tickers.  
4
Touch [OK].  
4
5
Touch [Delete].  
A message will appear asking you to  
confirm the deletion. Touch [OK].  
Storing browsable information  
p The displayed items depend on the infor-  
mation which is sent from each station.  
p [My Favorites] can store up to 50 items.  
If the storing step is successful, the confirma-  
tion screen will appear.  
Touch [OK] to complete the storing and return  
to the previous screen.  
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, then  
touch [Set My Favorites].  
The screen will display a list of categories. The  
information appearing onscreen is automati-  
cally updated at regular intervals.  
Displaying favorite browsable  
Information  
XM special contents can be assigned as a  
shortcut or My Favoritesso that it can be  
accessed without having to search every time  
an update is needed. The following are the in-  
structions on how to do so:  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
05  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
Depending on the XM tuners (GEX-  
P10XMT) reception status, any one of the  
following may appear.  
1
2
Store the desired item (topic).  
!
!
!
!
OK  
No problem.  
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [My Favorites].  
Updating  
Updating encryption code.  
A list of registered items (topics) appears on  
the screen. Touch the item to display informa-  
tion about this item.  
Check antenna  
Improper antenna connection.  
Deleting favorite browsable information  
Not Connected  
2 Signal Strength  
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and  
Depending on the signal strength, any one  
of the following may appear.  
then touch [My Favorites].  
2
3
Touch [Delete].  
!
!
!
!
!
Very Strong  
Strong  
Marginal  
Weak  
Touch the name of the items you wish  
to delete.  
A red check appears next to the items you  
touched.  
No signal  
3 Radio ID  
The radio ID appears.  
p To delete all favorite contents, touch [All].  
Red checks will appear next to all items.  
p If you have subscribed to either XM  
audio only or XM NavTraffic stand alone,  
you will see [Updating] in [Status]. This  
is because the GEX-P10XMT is con-  
stantly checking to see if you have  
decided to add the other service while  
your navigation system is turned on. If  
you subscribe to both services, the ap-  
propriate status will be shown in  
[Status].  
4
5
Touch [Delete].  
A message will appear asking you to  
confirm the deletion. Touch [OK].  
Checking the Reception  
Status of the XM Tuner  
The current XM tuners (GEX-P10XMT) recep-  
tion status and signal strength appear on  
screen. (The information that is transmitted  
via XM DATA cable is displayed in this screen.)  
Emergency Info  
The Emergency Info screen provides impor-  
tant emergency information pertaining to your  
vehicle, insurance, and current location. Such  
emergency information could be useful in the  
event of an accident or vehicle breakdown.  
The accuracy of the personal information is  
dependent on the accuracy of the information  
entered into the navigation system by the user.  
%
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [XM Status].  
1
2
3
1 Status  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
05  
to charges by Signatures Nationwide Auto  
Club, Inc. You are also subject to charges  
by Signatures Nationwide Auto Club, Inc.  
for roadside services not included in the  
Emergency Roadside Assistance service.  
The terms and conditions regarding the  
Emergency Roadside Assistance service  
provided by Signatures Nationwide Auto  
Club, Inc. are determined solely and exclu-  
sively by Signatures Nationwide Auto Club,  
Inc. Please contact Signatures Nationwide  
Auto Club, Inc. for more information. The  
telephone number that appears here by de-  
fault is the toll free number for this service.  
For additional details on registering for this  
service, please check your product registra-  
tion card included with this product. If you  
are not interested in the free Roadside As-  
sistance service, this number can be edited  
and replaced by your own roadside assis-  
tance telephone number.  
WARNING  
The Emergency Info screen is only intended to  
provide information to a driver that may be useful  
during an emergency situation, and does not re-  
place the need to call for emergency assistance,  
when necessary.  
Checking the information  
registered as Emergency Info  
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and  
then touch [Emergency Info].  
%
1
2
p The police number is shown as 911 and  
cannot be changed.  
4
3
4 Locate Car Service  
The information registered as Emergency Info  
appears on the screen.  
1 You are currently at:  
Your current position is indicated by the  
street name, latitude, and longitude.  
2 Personal Information:  
Registering user information  
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and  
Your VIN number, insurance policy number,  
and the telephone number of your insur-  
ance company can be displayed once en-  
tered by the user.  
then touch [Emergency Info].  
2
3
Touch [Setup].  
3 Emergency TOW service phone:  
1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assis-  
tance service is available to all registered  
owners and provided by Signatures Nation-  
wide Auto Club, Inc. The first year of Emer-  
gency Roadside Assistance service is paid  
for by Pioneer only if your navigation system  
is registered with Pioneer and you sign up  
on-line with Signatures Nationwide Auto  
Club, Inc. at the time you register your navi-  
gation system with Pioneer. If you have not  
signed up for this service with Signatures  
Nationwide Auto Club, Inc., or if your free  
one-year period has expired, you are subject  
Touch the desired item to register your  
information.  
p If information is already registered, the re-  
gistered information will appear.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
05  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
4
Input the number you wish to register,  
1
Touch [Info/Traffic] in NAVI MENU, and  
and then touch [OK].  
then touch [Emergency Info].  
2
Touch [Locate Car Service].  
Edit VIN:  
Register your Vehicles Identification Number.  
(You can enter between 1 and 17 digits.)  
Edit Policy number:  
A list of auto services appears onscreen.  
Touch the Category of the auto service  
3
Register your insurance policy number.  
you wish to use.  
A red check appears next to the selected cate-  
gory.  
Edit Insurance Phone:  
Register your insurance companys phone  
number.  
p The Auto Service categories that can be se-  
lected in Emergency Info are;  
[Automotive], [Rental Car Agency], and  
[Car Dealer].  
Edit TOW Service Phone:  
Record a towing companys phone number.  
5
Touch [Save].  
Completes the registration.  
p If you want to stop registration, touch  
[Back].  
4
Touch [OK].  
A list of names of facilities in the vicinity and  
the distances from your current position will  
be displayed.  
p Touching displays a list of subcategories.  
Touch the subcategories you wish to use  
from among those displayed and touch  
[OK] to select the Auto Service from the  
subcategories.  
Searching for car service in an  
emergency  
In times of emergency, you can search the  
Emergency Info for Auto Services in the vici-  
nity of your current position and set the cur-  
rent route.  
WARNING  
The Emergency Info screen is only intended to  
provide information to a driver that may be useful  
during an emergency situation and if they are in  
a safe location. If not, or in all major accidents,  
call 911.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
05  
5
Touch the name of the facility to set the  
In the menu operation screen, you can specify  
a picture for the background. Some pictures  
are already stored, but you can also use pic-  
tures (JPEG format data) created by a personal  
computer or a digital camera. If you save the  
pictures to a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW, you  
can use them as background pictures. The fol-  
lowing three types of background pictures can  
be changed:  
route you want.  
!
Splash Screen: The screen that appears  
when the Navigation system starts up.  
Displays the route to the selected facility.  
!
AV Background: Background for the  
screen during AV operations or during play-  
back.  
When appears to the right of the list  
You can also set a destination by touching  
to the right of the destination list such as Ad-  
dress Book. Touch [OK] to confirm. The loca-  
tion indicated by the scroll cursor will be set  
as a destination.  
!
Navigation Background: Background of  
navigation menu screen.  
Several background pictures are stored in the  
Pioneer DVD Map Disc. If you want to use  
these pictures, insert the Pioneer DVD Map  
Disc.  
Here, a method for changing the background  
picture is described with an example of load-  
ing a picture stored on a CD-R/-RW and DVD-  
R/-RW onto the navigation system as the back-  
ground picture.  
p When storing original pictures on a CD-R/-  
RW and DVD-R/-RW, create a folder named  
PICTURESin the CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-  
RW, and store the picture files in this folder.  
Up to 20 picture files can be used in  
PICTURES folder.  
Scroll:  
The map display changes to Shortcut menu.  
If you touch anywhere on the map, the map  
display changes to Scroll mode.  
p You cannot use a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-  
RW containing MP3/WMA/AAC files or the  
Audio data part (CD-DA session) for Back-  
ground Picture Setting function.  
p Only JPEG format (.jpgor .JPG) pictures  
can be used as a background picture.  
p You can only use standard characters (al-  
phabets of both cases: A-Z, a-z) and num-  
bers (0-9) for the file name of a background  
picture (international (accented) characters  
cannot be used).  
Changing Background Picture  
CAUTION  
When you burn a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW,  
make sure the total data size of the CD-R/-RW  
and DVD-R/-RW is greater than the amount noted  
below by storing dummy data or other filler infor-  
mation. Otherwise, the disc may not be recog-  
nized by the built-in DVD drive.  
p Pictures up to a maximum of 2 048×1 536  
pixels can be used. We cannot guarantee  
proper operation for a picture bigger than  
this size.  
!
!
CD-R/-RW: 1.8 MB  
DVD-R/-RW: 170 MB  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
05  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
p Progressive format JPEG pictures cannot  
Repeat:  
be used.  
Selected picture is repeated in a pattern to  
cover the whole screen.  
The background image starts changing. After  
a short while, the new background image ap-  
pears.  
p When you select images stored on the  
Pioneer DVD Map Disc, you cannot select  
the layout method.  
p When the picture starts to change, do not  
turn off the vehicle engine until the mes-  
sage appears to indicate that the picture  
has finished changing.  
1
2
Insert a disc to the disc loading slot.  
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU, then  
touch [System Options].  
3
Touch [Background Picture Setting].  
The picture selected for each screen is indi-  
cated on the right side of [Splash Screen],  
[Navigation Background] and [AV Back-  
ground] items.  
4
Touch [Splash Screen], [Navigation  
Background] or [AV Background].  
8
Touch [Done].  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
5
Touch [Import from Disc].  
The list of the pictures stored in the disc is dis-  
played.  
Select another Picture:  
This is selected when you want to change to  
another picture. Return to Step 5.  
On this screen, you can select the following  
item:  
Back to Original:  
The picture originally used when the system  
was purchased is selected.  
Change another background:  
Select if you want to successively change the  
Splash Screen, AV operation screen back-  
grounds or the Navigation backgrounds. Re-  
turn to step 3.  
p When the navigation system is reset, or the  
language setting is changed, the back-  
ground picture may change back to the ori-  
ginal picture. (There is also a possibility that  
the system will revert to the original picture  
for some other reason.) If this happens, set  
the background picture again.  
p Only when a Pioneer DVD Map Disc is in-  
serted, you can select [Back to Original].  
Only when the CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW  
is inserted, you can select [Import from  
Disc].  
p Touching other than [Import from Disc] al-  
lows you to select a background image  
stored on the Pioneer DVD Map Disc.  
6
Touch a picture you want for the back-  
ground.  
7
Select how to display the picture.  
Setting Vehicle Dynamics  
Display  
You can change the values displayed by the in-  
struments on the left and right of Vehicle Dy-  
namics Display.  
You can select the following items:  
Center:  
Selected picture is displayed at the center of  
the screen.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
05  
Until the sensors initial learning is complete,  
only the voltage and clock are displayed.  
terns from among those displayed onscreen to  
change the panel to the selected pattern.  
p If you touch [Peak Hold Reset], the maxi-  
mum and minimum (green line) values indi-  
cated in [Acceleration] and [Side  
Acceleration] are reset.  
p You cannot change the speedometer at the  
center.  
p Selecting Demo Mode in Settings menu  
enables you to perform a demonstration  
with random values.  
1
Switch to Vehicle Dynamics Display.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch the left or right instrument.  
Touch panel keys are displayed.  
3
Touch the items you want to display.  
Checking the Navigation  
Status  
The navigation status, including the driving  
status of a vehicle, positioning status by satel-  
lite, learning status of the 3D sensor and cable  
connection status, can be checked.  
You can select the following items:  
Voltage:  
Displays the power supply and voltage sup-  
plied from the battery to this system.  
Checking sensor learning  
status and driving status  
Acceleration:  
Displays acceleration in a forward direction. +  
sign indicates acceleration while - sign indi-  
cates deceleration.  
1
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU, then  
touch [Hardware Info].  
2
Touch [3D Calibration].  
Side Acceleration:  
The 3D Calibration Status screen appears.  
Displays acceleration in a side direction, such  
as when turning. + sign indicates a right turn,  
while - sign indicates a left turn.  
1
2
3
Angular Velocity:  
Displays the vehicles turning angle over one  
second (how far it has turned in a second).  
4
Slope:  
Displays the vehicles vertical movement. +  
side represents the rising angle, and - side the  
falling angle.  
6
7
5
1 Distance  
Driving distance is indicated.  
2 Speed Pulse  
Total number of speed pulses is indicated.  
3 Learning Status  
Current driving mode is indicated.  
Direction:  
Displays the direction your vehicle is traveling  
in.  
Clock:  
Displays the current time.  
Adjust Look:  
Touch [Adjust Look] to display a screen for se-  
lecting the panel pattern. Touch one of the pat-  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
05  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
4 Degree of learning  
Checking the connections of  
leads and installation positions  
Check that leads are properly connected be-  
tween the navigation system and the vehicle.  
Please also check whether they are connected  
in the correct positions.  
Sensor learning situations for distance (Dis-  
tance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn  
(Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D) are indi-  
cated by the length of bars.  
p When tires have been changed or chains  
fitted, turning on the Speed Pulse allows  
the system to detect the fact that the tire  
diameter has changed, and automati-  
cally replaces the value for calculating  
distance.  
1
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU, then  
touch [Hardware Info].  
2
Touch [Connection Status].  
The Connection Status screen appears.  
p If ND-PG1 is connected, the distance cal-  
culation value cannot be replaced auto-  
matically.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5 Speed  
Speed detected by the navigation system is  
indicated. (This indication may be different  
from the actual speed of your vehicle, so  
please do not use this instead of the speed-  
ometer of your vehicle.)  
6 Acceleration or deceleration/Rotational  
speed  
Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your  
vehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speed  
when your vehicle turns to left or right is  
shown.  
1 Speed Pulse  
The Speed Pulse value detected by the navi-  
gation system is shown. 0is shown while  
the vehicle is stationary.  
2 GPS Antenna  
Indicates the connection status of the GPS  
antenna, the reception sensitivity and from  
how many satellites the signal is received.  
If the signal is received correctly, [OK] is dis-  
played. If reception is poor, [NOK] appears.  
3 Installation Position  
7 Inclination  
Degree of slope of the street that you are  
currently running is indicated.  
The installation position of the navigation  
system is shown.  
To clear values...  
If installed correctly, [OK] appears. Indicates  
whether the installation position of the navi-  
gation system is correct or not. When the  
navigation system is installed at an extreme  
angle exceeding the limitation of the instal-  
ling angle, [Incorrect angle] will be dis-  
played. When the angle of the navigation  
system has been changed, [Excessive vi-  
bration] will be displayed.  
If you want to delete the learned results stored  
in [Distance], [Speed Pulse] or [Learning Sta-  
tus], touch the relevant result, then touch  
[Clear].  
p The navigation system can automatically  
use its sensor memory based on the outer  
dimensions of the tires.  
4 Parking Brake  
When the parking brake is applied, [On] is  
displayed. When the parking brake is re-  
leased, [Off] is displayed.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Editing the Navigation Utilities  
05  
5 Power Voltage  
The power supply (reference value) provided  
from the vehicle battery to the navigation  
system is shown. If the voltage does not fall  
within the range of 11 V to 15 V, check that  
power cable connection is correct.  
6 Illumination  
When the headlights or small lamps of a ve-  
hicle are on, [On] is displayed. (If the or-  
ange/white lead is not connected, [Off]  
appears.)  
7 Back Signal  
When the gear lever is shifted to R, the sig-  
nal switches to [High] or [Low]. (Which of  
these is displayed depends on the  
vehicle.)  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
06  
Customizing Your Navigation System  
[Mile&Yard] is displayed below [KM / Mile  
Setting], indicating that [KM / Mile Setting]  
is set to [Mile&Yard].  
If you want to change another setting, select  
the item you want to change and repeat the  
procedure in step 3.  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these  
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-  
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in  
a safe place and apply the parking brake (refer to  
Items Users can Change  
Modifying the Default  
Settings  
You can tailor default settings, such as naviga-  
tion functions and information display, for  
ease of use.  
This section describes the details of the set-  
ting for each item. Settings marked with an as-  
terisk (*) show that they are default or factory  
settings.  
The following example describes how to  
change settings. In this example, the [KM /  
Mile Setting] settings is set to [Mile&Yard].  
Volume  
The sound volume for the navigation can be  
set. You can set the volume of the route gui-  
dance and of the beep sound separately.  
To display the Volume setting screen, touch  
[Volume] in Settings menu.  
1
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU.  
Settings menu appears.  
2
Touch [System Options].  
The screen changes. [Mile] is displayed below  
[KM / Mile Setting], indicating that this func-  
tion is currently set to [Mile].  
p When you touch items with a setting below  
them, their setting changes. When you  
touch items with no setting below them, a  
setting screen appears.  
p Touching [Back] switch to Settings Menu.  
p When you move to the Volume setting  
screen by touching [Volume] in Settings  
menu, touching [Back] returns you to Set-  
tings menu screen.  
3
Touch [KM / Mile Setting].  
Guidance Volume  
Touch [+] or [-] to change the Guidance vo-  
lume.  
Beep Volume  
Touch [+] or [-] to change the Beep volume.  
Voice Guidance  
This setting controls whether the volume of  
the AV source is automatically muted during  
voice guidance.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing Your Navigation System  
06  
On*:  
Average Speed  
During voice guidance, the volume of the AV  
source is muted automatically.  
Off:  
Volume of the AV source stays the same dur-  
ing voice guidance.  
p When [Voice Guidance] is [On], be sure to  
set [Mute Input/Guide] setting in AV  
MENU to [Mute] or [ATT].  
When calculating estimated time of arrival  
and the number of hours to the destination,  
set the average speed for the freeway or ordin-  
ary road using [+] and [-].  
Minor Ordinary Road:  
!
When [KM / Mile Setting] is set to [Mile]  
or [Mile&Yard], it can be set in 5 mile in-  
crements from 10 miles to 100 miles (35  
miles*).  
!
When [KM / Mile Setting] is set to [km], it  
can be set in 5 km increments from 20 km  
to 110 km (55 km*).  
System Options  
Touch [System Options] in Settings menu to  
display.  
Major Ordinary Road:  
!
When [KM / Mile Setting] is set to [Mile]  
or [Mile&Yard], it can be set in 5 mile in-  
crements from 10 miles to 120 miles (45  
miles*).  
!
When [KM / Mile Setting] is set to [km], it  
can be set in 5 km increments from 20 km  
to 150 km (70 km*).  
Freeway:  
!
When [KM / Mile Setting] is set to [Mile]  
or [Mile&Yard], it can be set in 5 mile in-  
crements from 30 miles to 120 miles (60  
miles*).  
Language Selection  
= For details, refer to Select the language from  
Once you change the language, installation of  
the program starts.  
!
When [KM / Mile Setting] is set to [km], it  
can be set in 5 km increments from 60 km  
to 150 km (95 km*).  
Background Picture Setting  
CAUTION  
= For details, refer to Changing Background  
Once the installation of the program starts, do  
not stop the engine of your vehicle and do not  
switch off the navigation system until the installa-  
tion is completed and the map of your surround-  
ings appears.  
Read from Disc  
= For details, refer to Loading registered loca-  
KM / Mile Setting  
This setting controls the unit of distance dis-  
played on your navigation system.  
Mile *:  
Show distances in miles.  
Mile&Yard:  
Show distances in miles and yards.  
km:  
Show distances in kilometers.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
06  
Customizing Your Navigation System  
: Route Options  
Short-Cut Selection  
Displays Route Options menu.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Select shortcuts to display on the map screen.  
In the list displayed onscreen, the items with  
red checks are displayed on Shortcut menu.  
Touch the shortcut you wish to display and  
then touch [Done] when a red check appears.  
You can select up to three shortcuts.  
: Edit Current Route  
Displays the screen for adding or deleting way  
points.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
: Traffic On Route  
Displays a list of traffic information on the  
route.  
: Registration*  
Register information about the location indi-  
cated by the scroll cursor to Address Book.  
= For details, refer to Confirming traffic infor-  
: Vicinity Search*  
: Stock Info  
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of  
the scroll cursor.  
Displays share prices.  
= For details, refer to Displaying stock prices  
= For details, refer to Searching the facilities  
: Set My Favorites  
: Volume Setting*  
Displays XM tuner content information.  
= For details, refer to Storing browsable infor-  
Set the sound volume for the navigation.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
: My Favorites  
: Whole Route Overview  
Displays the entire currently set route.  
Displays information on your favorite item.  
= For details, refer to Displaying favorite brow-  
: Overlay POI  
Displays marks for surrounding facilities (POI)  
on the map.  
Map Display Options  
Touch [Map Display Options] in Settings  
Menu to display.  
= For details, refer to Displaying Certain POI  
: Address Book  
Displays Address Book.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing Your Navigation System  
06  
Tracking Display  
Arrow in AV  
The tracking display setting has the following  
options.  
Set whether to display the guidance informa-  
tion with arrows on the AV operation screen.  
Always:  
Display tracking for all journeys.  
This Trip:  
Display tracking dots but erase them when the  
navigation system is turned off (when turning  
off the engine of your vehicle).  
Off*:  
On*:  
Displays guidance information with arrows on  
the AV operation screen.  
Off:  
Does not display guidance information with  
arrows on the AV operation screen.  
Do not display tracking dots.  
Defined Locations  
Touch [Defined Locations] in Settings menu  
to display.  
AV Guide Mode  
Set whether to automatically switch to the na-  
vigation screen from the AV operation screen  
when your vehicle approaches a guidance  
point such as an intersection while displaying  
a screen other than navigation.  
On*:  
Switches from AV operation screen to naviga-  
tion screen.  
Off:  
Set Home”  
Does not switch the screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Day/Night Display  
To improve the visibility of the map during the  
evening, you can change the combination of  
the colors of the map.  
Map in Memory  
The memory area is the area in the map,  
which is being read in advance for the mem-  
ory navi mode. There are two ways of setting  
the memory area.  
Nighttime*:  
You can change the combination of the colors  
of a map according to whether the vehicle  
lights are On or Off.  
Daytime:  
The map is always displayed with bright col-  
ors.  
Close-up of Junction  
This setting enables switching to an enlarged  
map around the point where your vehicle is  
approaching an intersection, entrance/exit of  
freeway or a junction.  
Around Current Position:  
A square that has sides of approximately 10.6  
miles (17 km) with the selected location at the  
center is read into the memory.  
Indicate the map you want to store in the  
memory by touching c, d, a or b. Then, ad-  
just the map scale to the one you desire, and  
touch [OK].  
On*:  
Switches to an enlarged map.  
Off:  
Does not switch to an enlarged map.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
06  
Customizing Your Navigation System  
Continuously touching c, d, a or b allows  
Demo Mode  
you to rapidly scroll the map screen.  
p An area not stored in the DVD Map Disc  
cannot be memorized.  
This is a demonstration function for shops.  
After a route is set, a simulation of route gui-  
dance to a destination is automatically dis-  
played. Normally, set this to [Off].  
Around Current Route:  
Sets the surrounding currently set route to the  
memory area. The route to the destination will  
appear on screen. You can memorize the area  
by touching [OK].  
p The extent of the information that can be  
set in the memory area is about 6.6 miles  
(10.6 km) surrounding the route.  
Repeat:  
Repeat demo drive.  
Off*:  
Demo Mode is set off.  
p If you eject the DVD Map Disc during the  
demo drive, the demo mode will be  
stopped.  
Set Go To”  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Time  
Adjusts the systems clock. The time difference  
(+, -) between the time originally set in your  
navigation system is set here.  
You can also select summer time On/Off.  
= For details, refer to step 7 in Installing the  
Summer Time  
Choose whether or not to take summer time  
into account.  
On:  
Summer time is taken into account.  
Off*:  
Summer time is not taken into account.  
p When the period of summer time comes,  
or when the summer time ends, this unit  
does not automatically change the summer  
time setting.  
= Refer to step 6 in Installing the Program on  
Modify Current Location  
Touch the screen to adjust the current position  
and direction of the vehicle displayed on the  
map.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing Your Navigation System  
06  
Hardware Info  
Touch [Hardware Info] in Settings menu to  
display.  
Connection Status  
= For details, refer to Checking the connec-  
3D Calibration  
= For details, refer to Checking the Navigation  
Service Info Screen  
Displays the disc production number and ver-  
sion information.  
Restore Factory Settings  
Reset various settings registered to the naviga-  
tion system and restores to the default or fac-  
tory settings. To restore, touch [Yes].  
p About the item return to the default, please  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
This chapter describes how to display AV  
MENU for AV operations and perform opera-  
tions with the DVD drive and radio.  
How to Display each Menu  
1
Press VOLUME knob (or AV button) to  
switch to the AV operation screen.  
2
Press MENU button to change to AV  
MENU.  
3
Touch [Sound], [Function] or [System]  
to enter the menu you want to operate.  
Each menu is displayed. The items that cannot  
be operated according to the sources or condi-  
tions are indicated in gray.  
p If you touch [AV Source], the screen  
changes to AV Source screen.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
07  
Function menu  
2
3
1
Sound menu  
System menu  
p When the source is [OFF], [Function] key  
Operating the Built-in DVD  
drive  
changes to [Initial] key.  
1 Function key  
This section explains the operation of DVD-  
Video, CD, MP3/WMA/AAC or DivX.  
p The built-in DVD drive of this unit can re-  
cognize the several types of media as fol-  
lowing sources:  
Touch to enter Function menu for each  
source.  
= Using the Function menu d Operating  
using Function menu (each source)”  
and Advanced <each source> opera-  
tion”  
DVD-Video: DVD-V”  
Audio data (CD-DA): CD”  
Compressed audio (MP3/WMA/AAC)  
files: ROM”  
DivX video files: DivX”  
2 Sound key  
Touch to select various sound quality con-  
trols.  
= For details, refer to Audio Adjustments  
on page 168for more cautions about  
handling each media.  
3 System key  
Touch to select various setup functions.  
= For details, refer to Other Functions on  
4
Press MENU button to return to the dis-  
play of each source.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
DVD-Video  
1
2
3
7 6  
4
5
1 Source icon  
2 Title number indicator  
3 Chapter or file number indicator  
4 Play time indicator  
CD  
1
8
4
5 Viewing angle indicator  
6 Subtitle language indicator  
7 Audio language indicator  
8 Track number indicator  
9
a
9 Repeat/Random/Scan indicator  
The marks shown below indicate the current  
playback status.  
ROM (MP3/WMA/AAC files)  
1
c
8
4
and repeat range: Displays the repeat  
range  
d
: Random  
: Scan  
a Detail information display  
Displays the track title, artist and disc title.  
a
9
b
: Track title  
: Artist  
DivX  
: Disc title (album title)  
p The “–” mark is displayed if there is no  
corresponding information.  
1
c
3
e 6  
4
f
See the following pages for instructions on op-  
erating each type of disc.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
07  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
b Current folder name indicator  
c Folder number indicator  
d File type indicator  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
Touch panel keys (Page 1)  
e Audio indicator  
2
1
f Repeat indicator  
Switching the media files type  
2
6
When playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types such as DivX and  
MP3, you can switch between media files  
types to play.  
7
4
3
%
Touch [Media] to switch between  
Touch panel keys (Page 2)  
media file types.  
Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between  
the following media file types:  
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) ROM (MP3/WMA/  
AAC files) DivX (DivX video files)  
p There is sometimes a delay between start-  
ing up playback and the sound being is-  
sued. This is particularly the case when  
playing back multi-session discs and discs  
with many folders. When being read in,  
Reading Format is displayed.  
8
5
7
4
3
7
4
3
Touch panel keys (Page 3)  
p Playback is carried out in order of file num-  
ber. Folders are skipped if they contain no  
files. (If folder 001 (ROOT) contains no files,  
playback commences with folder 002.)  
p When playing back files recorded as VBR  
(variable bit rate) files, the play time will not  
be correctly displayed if fast forward or re-  
wind operations are used.  
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is not  
valid.  
p If more than 255 tracks are stored in the  
folder, some time may be required to dis-  
play the track list.  
1 Playback and Pause  
Pause lets you temporarily stop disc play-  
back. Touching f switches between  
playbackand pause.  
p The icon e is displayed and playback is  
paused letting you view a still image.  
Touch panel key operation (DVD-V)  
1
Touch [DISC] in AV Source screen to se-  
lect the built-in DVD drive.  
If no disc is loaded in navigation system, you  
cannot select [DISC] (built-in DVD drive).  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
2 Skip the chapter forward or backward  
Operation using Function menu  
(DVD-V)  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each  
Touching p skips to the start of the next  
chapter. Touching o once skips to the  
start of the current chapter. Touching again  
will skip to the previous chapter.  
p You can also select a chapter by pressing  
o or p button on the hardware.  
Function menu  
3 Hide the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] clears the touch panel  
keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen,  
display the touch panel keys again.  
4 Switch the display  
Touching [Disp] changes the information as  
follows:  
Disc information display Repeat range  
display  
1
2
3
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
Title Repeat just the current title  
Chapter Repeat just the current chap-  
ter  
5 Skip the title forward or backward  
Touching a skips to the start of the next  
title. Touching b skips to the start of the pre-  
vious title.  
!
Disc Play throughout the current disc  
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast  
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,  
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].  
6 Stop playback  
When you stop playback by touching g,  
that location on the disc is memorized en-  
abling playback from that point when you  
play the disc again.  
2 Selecting audio output  
When playing DVD-Video discs recorded  
with LPCM audio, you can switch the audio  
output. Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until  
the desired audio output appears in the dis-  
play.  
p To play the disc again, touch f.  
7 Switch to other pages of touch panel  
keys  
!
!
!
!
L+R Left and right  
L Left  
R Right  
8 Fast rewind or forward  
Touching m or n to perform fast rewind  
or forward. If you keep touching m or n  
for five seconds, the icon m or n  
Mix Mixing left and right  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
changes into  
or  
. When this hap-  
pens, fast rewind/ fast forward continues  
even if you release m or n. To resume  
playback at a desired point, touch f, m  
or n opposite to key pushed for five sec-  
onds.  
p You can also perform fast rewind/fast for-  
ward by holding o or p button on  
the hardware.  
3 Setting Up the DVD/DivX Player  
Other functions (DVD-V)  
Operating the DVD menu  
Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc  
contents using a menu.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
07  
p Touch [Touch] to switch direct touch con-  
p This function is available for DVD-Video.  
p You can display the menu by touching  
[Menu] or [TOP M.] while a disc is playing.  
Touching either of these keys again lets you  
start playback from the location selected  
from the menu. For details, refer to the in-  
structions provided with the disc.  
trol.  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during playback.  
Using DVD menu direct touch control  
%
Touch r during playback.  
Each time you touch r, you move ahead one  
frame.  
To return to normal playback, touch f.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
This function allows you to operate the DVD  
menu by touching the menu item on the  
screen directly.  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
1
Keep touching r until  
during playback.  
The icon is displayed, forward slow motion  
is displayed  
p This function can be used when the  
key is displayed on the lower right corner of  
the LCD screen.  
p Depending on the contents of DVD discs,  
this function may not work properly. In this  
case, use touch panel keys to operate the  
DVD menu.  
playback begins.  
To return to normal playback, touch f.  
2
Press r to adjust playback speed dur-  
ing slow motion playback.  
Each time you press r it changes the speed  
in four steps in the following order:  
1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2  
p Touch  
to operate DVD menu. And then touch  
[ESC], key is not displayed.  
key to display touch panel keys  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
p Reverse slow motion playback is not possi-  
ble.  
Using DVD menu by touch panel keys  
If  
key is not displayed, DVD menu is op-  
erated by touch panel keys.  
1
Touch the screen to display the touch  
Searching for a playback location  
panel keys.  
When playing back a DVD-Video, you can  
search for a specific title, chapter or time to  
begin playback.  
p Chapter search and time search are not  
possible when disc playback has been  
stopped.  
2
Touch  
.
Touch panel keys to operate DVD menu ap-  
pear.  
3
Touch a, b, c or d to select the desired  
menu item, and touch [Enter].  
Playback starts from the selected menu item.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch desired  
Changing the subtitle language  
during playback (Multi-subtitle)  
With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings,  
you can switch between subtitle languages  
during playback.  
item.  
When playing a DVD, touch [Title] (title),  
[Chapter] (chapter) or [Time] (time).  
2
Touch 0 9 to input the desired num-  
ber.  
%
Touch [S.Title] during playback.  
For titles and chapters  
Each time you touch [S.Title] switches be-  
tween subtitle language.  
!
!
!
To select 3, touch 3.  
To select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order.  
To select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order.  
p With some DVDs, switching between subti-  
tle languages may only be possible using a  
menu display.  
p Touching [S.Title] during fast forward/fast  
rewind, pause or slow motion playback re-  
turns you to normal playback.  
For time (time search)  
!
To select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2, 1,  
4 and 3 in order.  
To select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the  
time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch  
7, 1, 0 and 0 in order.  
!
Changing the viewing angle during  
playback (Multi-angle)  
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot  
from multiple angles) recordings, you can  
switch among viewing angles during play-  
back.  
touch [Enter].  
This starts playback from the selected scene.  
p During playback of a scene shot from mul-  
tiple angles, the angle icon is displayed.  
Turn angle icon display on or off using  
DVD/DivX Setup menu.  
= For details, refer to Setting angle icon dis-  
Changing audio system and audio  
language during playback (Multi-audio)  
With DVDs featuring multi-audio recordings,  
you can switch between languages/audio sys-  
tems during playback.  
%
Touch [Audio] during playback.  
%
Touch [Angle] during playback of a  
Each time you touch [Audio] switches be-  
tween audio mode.  
scene shot from multiple angles.  
Each time you touch [Angle] switches be-  
tween angle.  
p With some DVDs, switching between lan-  
guages/audio systems may only be possible  
while using a menu display.  
p Display indications such as Dolby D and  
M ch indicate the audio system recorded  
on the DVD. Depending on the setting, play-  
back may not be with the same audio sys-  
tem as the one indicated.  
p Touching [Angle] during fast forward/fast  
rewind, pause or slow motion playback re-  
turns you to normal playback.  
Resume playback (Bookmark)  
When playing DVD-Video discs, you can use  
this function.  
The Bookmark function lets you resume play-  
back from a selected scene the next time the  
disc is loaded.  
p Touching [Audio] during fast forward/fast  
rewind, pause or slow motion playback re-  
turns you to normal playback.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
07  
Touching [B.Mark];  
Touch panel keys (ROM)  
You can bookmark a point for every five disc. If  
you try to memorize a point for the same disc,  
the oldest bookmark will be replaced by the  
new one.  
p To clear the bookmark on a disc, keep  
touching [B.Mark] during playback.  
2
1
4
2
Pressing and holding EJECT button;  
You can also bookmark a point for one disc by  
pressing and holding EJECT button. Next time  
you load the same disc, playback will resume  
from the bookmarked point. If you newly book-  
mark a point for with this method, previous  
bookmarked point will be overwritten.  
p In playback, the point bookmarked with  
this method is given priority over the point  
bookmarked with using [B.Mark].  
3
1 Playback and Pause  
Pause lets you temporarily stop disc play-  
back. Touching f switches between  
playbackand pause.  
PAUSE is displayed and playback is paused.  
2 Skip the track or file forward or back-  
ward  
Touching p skips to the start of the next  
track or file. Touching o once skips to the  
start of the current track or file. Touching  
again will skip to the previous track or file.  
p You can also select a track or file by  
pressing o or p button on the hard-  
ware.  
Fast rewind or forward  
Keep touching o or p to perform fast  
rewind or forward.  
Touch panel key operation (CD,  
ROM)  
1
Touch [DISC] in AV Source screen to se-  
lect the built-in DVD drive.  
If no disc is loaded in navigation system, you  
cannot select [DISC] (built-in DVD drive).  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
p You can also perform fast rewind/fast for-  
ward by holding o or p button on  
the hardware.  
panel keys.  
Touch panel keys (CD)  
2
1
3 Hide the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] clears the touch panel  
keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen,  
display the touch panel keys again.  
2
4 Move the folder  
When a ROM is played, touch a or b to se-  
lect the desired folder. You cannot select a  
folder that does not have an MP3/WMA/  
AAC file recorded in it.  
3
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
p If the upper folder has no MP3/WMA/AAC  
Displaying text information  
Touch  
The next piece of information is displayed.  
files, the track or file currently playing will  
not change.  
%
.
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Album Title (album title)  
Track Title (track title)  
Folder Title (folder title)  
File Name (file name)  
Artist Name (artist name)  
Genre (genre)  
Randomly play tracks with one touch  
All of the songs in a disc can be played at ran-  
dom by only touching one key.  
%
Touch [Shuffle All].  
To cancel the random play, switch [Random]  
Year (year)  
to [Off] in Function menu.  
If specific information has not been recorded  
on MP3/WMA/AAC files on disc, nothing may  
be displayed.  
Operation using Function menu  
(CD, ROM)  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each  
Select the track from the list  
The list lets you see the list of track titles, file  
names or folder names on a disc and select  
one of them to play back.  
Function menu  
1
2
3
%
Touch [List].  
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[Detail].  
p Touching or switches to the next or pre-  
CD:  
vious page in the list.  
p The “–” mark is displayed if there is no cor-  
responding information.  
!
!
Disc Repeat the current disc  
Track Repeat just the current track  
p If you perform track search or fast for-  
ward/rewind, repeat play is automatically  
canceled.  
Moving to upper folders  
p When playing discs with MP3/WMA/  
AAC files and audio data (CD-DA), repeat  
play is performed within the each data  
session even if [Disc] is selected.  
ROM:  
When using a MP3/WMA/AAC disc in which  
the data is divided into folders, you can move  
a track or file to upper folders. This is used to  
play back tracks or files recorded in other  
folders.  
!
!
!
Folder Repeat the current folder  
Disc Repeat all tracks  
Track Repeat just the current track  
%
Touch  
p
.
is only displayed when the list is dis-  
played.  
p If the current folder is the ROOT folder,  
is displayed in gray.  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
07  
p If you select another folder during repeat  
play, the repeat play range changes to  
[Disc].  
p If you perform fast forward/rewind during  
[Track], the repeat play range changes to  
[Folder].  
p When [Folder] is selected, it is not possi-  
ble to play back a subfolder of that folder.  
p When playing discs with MP3/WMA/  
AAC files and audio data (CD-DA), repeat  
play is performed within the currently  
playing data session even if [Disc] is se-  
lected.  
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] during the re-  
peat play range is [Disc], the scan play is  
performed only first tracks of each  
folders.  
Touch panel key operation (DivX)  
1
Touch [DISC] in AV Source screen to se-  
lect the built-in DVD drive.  
If the DVD map disc is loaded or there is no  
disc in navigation system, you cannot select  
[DISC] (built-in DVD drive).  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
2 Play tracks in a random order  
Touching [Random] switches between [On]  
and [Off]. When using ROM, the tracks in  
the current repeat play range are randomly  
played.  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
Touch panel keys (Page 1)  
2
1
p If you turn [Random] to [On] during the  
repeat play range is [Track], the repeat  
play range changes to [Folder] automati-  
cally.  
5
2
6
3 Scanning play  
CD: Scan tracks of a CD  
Touching [Scan] switches between [On] and  
[Off]. Scan play lets you hear the first 10  
seconds of each track on the CD. When you  
find the desired track touch [Scan] to turn  
scan play off.  
7
4
3
Touch panel keys (Page 2)  
p After scanning of a CD is finished, nor-  
mal playback of the tracks will begin  
again.  
ROM: Scan folders and tracks  
Touching [Scan] switches between [On] and  
[Off]. Scan play is performed in the current  
repeat play range. When you find the de-  
sired track touch [Scan] to turn scan play  
off.  
p After track or folder scanning is finished,  
normal playback of the tracks will begin  
again.  
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] during the re-  
peat play range is [Track], the repeat play  
range changes to [Folder] automatically.  
5
7
4
3
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is not  
valid.  
1 Playback and Pause  
Pause lets you temporarily stop disc play-  
back. Touching f switches between  
playbackand pause.  
p The icon e is displayed and playback is  
paused letting you view a still image.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
2 Skip the file forward or backward  
Touching p skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching o once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching again will skip to  
the previous file.  
Function menu  
p You can also select a file by pressing o  
or p button on the hardware.  
3 Hide the touch panel keys  
1
2
Touching [Hide] clears the touch panel  
keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen,  
display the touch panel keys again.  
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
!
Folder Repeat the current folder  
Disc Repeat all files  
File Repeat just the current file  
4 Switch the display  
Touching [Disp] changes the information as  
follows:  
Audio, SubTitle, Repeat display Folder  
name display File name display  
p If you select another folder during repeat  
play, the repeat play range changes to  
[Disc].  
5 Move the folder up or down  
Touch a or b to select the desired folder.  
You cannot select a folder that does not  
have a DivX file recorded in it.  
p If you perform file search or fast forward/  
rewind during [File], the repeat play  
range changes to [Folder].  
p When [Folder] is selected, it is not possi-  
ble to play back a subfolder of that folder.  
6 Stop playback  
When you stop playback by touching g,  
that location on the disc is memorized en-  
abling playback from that point when you  
play the disc again.  
2 Setting Up the DVD/DivX Player  
p To play the disc again, touch f.  
Other functions (DivX)  
7 Switch to other pages of touch panel  
keys  
Fast rewind or forward  
Touching m or n to perform fast rewind or  
forward. If you keep touching m or n for  
five seconds, the icon m or n changes  
Operation using Function menu  
(DivX)  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each  
into  
or  
. When this happens, fast re-  
wind/ fast forward continues even if you re-  
lease m or n. To resume playback at a  
desired point, touch f, m or n opposite  
to key pushed for five seconds.  
p You can also perform fast rewind/fast for-  
ward by holding o or p button on the  
hardware.  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during playback.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
07  
%
Touch r during playback.  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
Each time you touch r, you move ahead one  
frame.  
touch [Enter].  
This starts playback from the selected scene.  
To return to normal playback, touch f.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
Changing audio system during  
playback (Multi-audio)  
With DivX featuring multi-audio recordings,  
you can switch between audio systems during  
playback.  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
%
Keep touching r until  
during playback.  
The icon is displayed, forward slow motion  
is displayed  
%
Touch [Audio] during playback.  
Each time you touch [Audio] switches be-  
tween audio mode.  
playback begins.  
p Display indications such as Dolby D and  
M ch indicate the audio system recorded  
on the DivX file. Depending on the setting,  
playback may not be with the same audio  
system as the one indicated.  
p Touching [Audio] during fast forward/fast  
rewind, pause or slow motion playback re-  
turns you to normal playback.  
To return to normal playback, touch f.  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
p Reverse slow motion playback is not possi-  
ble.  
Searching for a playback location  
Changing the subtitle during  
playback (Multi-subtitle)  
With DivX featuring multi-subtitle recordings,  
you can switch between subtitles during play-  
back.  
When playing back DivX, you can search for a  
specific folder, file or time to begin playback.  
p Time search and file search are not possi-  
ble when disc playback has been stopped.  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch desired  
item.  
p When playing DivX, touch [Folder] (folder),  
%
Touch [S.Title] during playback.  
Each time you touch [S.Title] switches be-  
tween subtitle.  
[File] (file) or [Time] (time).  
p Touching [S.Title] during fast forward/fast  
rewind, pause or slow motion playback re-  
turns you to normal playback.  
p When using DivX, you can switch between  
showing or hiding the subtitles while a sub-  
title file is displayed. This switches the sub-  
titles while displaying subtitles in a DivX  
file.  
2
ber.  
Touch 0 9 to input the desired num-  
For folders and files  
!
!
!
To select 3, touch 3.  
To select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order.  
To select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order.  
For time (time search)  
!
!
To select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2, 1,  
4 and 3 in order.  
To select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the  
time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch  
7, 1, 0 and 0 in order.  
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
07  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
Playing DivX® VOD content  
Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content  
Radio  
Listening to the radio  
may only be playable a fixed number of times.  
When you load a disc containing this type of  
1
2
3
4
DivX VOD content, the remaining number of  
plays is shown on-screen and you then have  
the option of playing the disc (thereby using  
up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If  
you load a disc that contains expired DivX  
VOD content (for example, content that has  
zero remaining plays), Rental expired is dis-  
played.  
5
6
p If your DivX VOD content allows an unlim-  
ited number of plays, then you may load  
the disc into your player and play the con-  
tent as often as you like, and no message  
will be displayed.  
1
2
3
4
p In order to play DivX VOD content on this  
unit, you first need to register the unit with  
your DivX VOD content provider. For infor-  
mation about your registration code, refer  
to Displaying your DivX® VOD registration  
p DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM  
(Digital Rights Management) system. This  
restricts playback of content to specific, re-  
gistered devices.  
7
These are the basic steps necessary to operate  
the radio.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
1 Source icon  
%
If the message is displayed after load-  
ing a disc containing DivX VOD content,  
touch [Play].  
2 Band indicator  
Playback of the DivX VOD content will start.  
p Touch [Next] or [Previous] to switch be-  
tween files.  
p If you do not want to play the DivX VOD con-  
tent, touch [Stop].  
3 Preset number indicator  
4 Frequency indicator  
5 STEREO indicator  
6 LOCAL indicator  
7 Preset list or Detail information display  
1
Touch [RADIO] in AV Source screen to  
select the radio.  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
07  
2
Touch [Band] to select a band.  
Preset list display  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired  
band is displayed, FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM.  
3
or  
To perform manual tuning, touch  
briefly.  
The frequencies move up or down step by  
step.  
4
To perform seek tuning, keep touching  
or for about one second and re-  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1  
(PRESET 1) P6 (PRESET 6) you can easily  
store up to six broadcast frequencies for later  
recall with the touch of a key.  
lease.  
The tuner will scan the frequencies until a  
broadcast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
You can cancel seek tuning by touching either  
or  
briefly.  
If you keep touching  
or  
you can  
skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts  
as soon as you release the keys.  
Switching between the detail  
information display and the  
preset list display  
Preset tuning keys (P1 P6)  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
1
When you find a frequency that you  
want to store in memory, keep touching a  
preset tuning key P1 P6 until the preset  
number (e.g., P.CH 1) stops flashing.  
The selected radio station frequency has been  
stored in memory.  
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).  
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes  
the detail information display or preset list dis-  
play.  
p Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three  
FM bands, and 6 AM stations can be stored  
in memory.  
Detail information display  
2
The next time you touch the same pre-  
set tuning key P1 P6, the radio station  
frequency is recalled from memory.  
p You can also use a and b to recall radio  
stations frequencies assigned to preset tun-  
ing keys P1 P6.  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)  
3
Touch c or d to set the sensitivity.  
Advanced radio operation  
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and  
two levels for AM:  
FM: 1 2 3 4  
AM: 1 2  
p The FM 4(AM 2) setting allows recep-  
tion of only the strongest stations, while  
lower settings let you receive progressively  
weaker stations.  
1
1 Function display  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM(best stations memory) lets you auto-  
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under preset tuning keys P1 P6  
and once stored there you can tune in to those  
frequencies with the touch of a key.  
1
Touch [BSM] in Function menu.  
2
Touch [Start] to turn BSM on.  
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under preset tuning keys P1 P6 in  
order of their signal strength. When finished,  
BSM stops flashing.  
To cancel the storage process, touch [Stop].  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have saved using P1 P6.  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those  
radio stations with sufficiently strong signals  
for good reception.  
1
Touch [Local] in Function menu.  
2
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
When Pioneer AV equipment is connected to  
the navigation system using IP-BUS, such  
equipment can be operated from the naviga-  
tion system.  
When reading this chapter, please also refer to  
the operation manual of the AV equipment  
connected to the navigation system.  
5 Play time indicator  
6 Repeat indicator  
7 Disc number list  
8 File type indicator  
When playing a ROM, the file type indicator  
is displayed.  
1
2
[AV1 Input] is set to [M-DVD].  
= For details, refer to Setting the video input  
Multi-DVD Player  
Playing a disc  
DVD-Video  
Touch [M-DVD] in AV Source screen to  
1
2
3
4
5
8
select the multi-DVD player.  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
3
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
4
Touch any of the keys [1 6] to select  
the disc you want to play.  
7
6
You can use the navigation system to control a  
DVD player or multi-DVD player (e.g. XDV-P6),  
which is sold separately. For details concern-  
ing operation, refer to the DVD players or  
multi-DVD players operation manual.  
This section provides information on DVD op-  
erations with the navigation system that differs  
from operations described in the DVD players  
or multi-DVD players operation manual.  
p This unit does not have ITS playlist and disc  
title functions.  
Operations and Functions  
Touch key operations and functions are basi-  
cally the same as those for the built-in DVD  
player. For detail, refer to following contents.  
Operating a DVD-V  
p Direct touch control is not available.  
p When you reproduce reverse slow motion,  
use DVD players or multi-DVD players re-  
mote control.  
p This unit cannot display the text informa-  
tion recorded on a CD TEXT disc playing on  
the optional DVD player.  
1 Source icon  
2 Disc number indicator  
Shows the number of the disc currently  
playing when using a multi-DVD player.  
p [B.Mark], [Disp], [Search] is not displayed.  
Operating a CD/ROM  
3 Title/Folder number indicator  
4 Chapter/Track number indicator  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
7 Detail information display  
Displays the track title, artist and album  
p AAC files cannot be played in XDV-P6.  
title.  
p [Shuffle All], [List] or [Detail],  
,
: Track title  
are not displayed.  
: Artist  
: Album title  
p The “–” mark is displayed if there is no  
corresponding information.  
USB  
8 Repeat/Random/Scan indicator  
The marks shown below indicate the current  
playback status.  
Operating the USB portable  
audio player/USB memory  
1
2
3
5
4
6
and repeat range: Displays the repeat  
range  
: Random  
: Scan  
1
Touch [USB] in AV Source screen to se-  
lect the USB.  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
7
8
2
Touch a or b to select a folder.  
You can control a USB portable audio player/  
USB memory by combining the USB adapter  
(e.g. CD-UB100) (sold separately) to the navi-  
gation system. For details concerning opera-  
tion, refer to the USB adapters operation  
manual.  
p Optimum performance of this unit may not  
be obtained depending on the connected  
USB portable audio player/USB memory.  
p You can listen to songs by connecting a  
USB portable audio player/USB memory  
that is USB Mass Storage Class compliant.  
For details about the supported USB mem-  
ory, refer to USB adapters operation man-  
ual.  
p Playback is carried out in order of file num-  
ber. Folders are skipped if they contain no  
files. (If folder 001 (ROOT) contains no files,  
playback commences with folder 002.)  
3
To skip back or forward to another  
compressed audio file, briefly touch o or  
p.  
4
To perform fast forward or rewind,  
keep touching o or p.  
Displaying text information  
The operation is the same as that of the built-  
in DVD drive.  
= For details, refer to Displaying text informa-  
p Genre and Year are not displayed.  
p If the characters recorded on the audio file  
are not compatible with this navigation sys-  
tem, those characters will not be displayed.  
1 Source icon  
2 Folder number indicator  
3 Track number indicator  
4 Play time indicator  
5 Current folder name indicator  
6 File type indicator  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
1 Function display  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each  
Switching between the detail  
information display and the list  
display  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
Repeating play  
There are three repeat play ranges for the USB  
portable audio player/USB memory; All (re-  
peat all files), Track (repeat one track) and  
Folder (repeat folder).  
%
Touch [List] (or [Detail]).  
Each touch of [List] (or [Detail]) changes the  
list display or detail information display.  
Detail information display  
%
Touch [Repeat] in Function menu.  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the settings  
as follows:  
!
All Repeat all files in the USB portable  
audio player/USB memory  
!
!
Track Repeat just the current track  
Folder Repeat the current folder  
p If you select another folder during repeat  
play, the repeat play range changes to [All].  
p If you perform track search or fast forward/  
rewind during [Track], the repeat play range  
changes to [Folder].  
List display  
Playing tracks in a random order  
Random play lets you play back tracks in a  
random order within the repeat range, [All] or  
[Folder].  
1
Select the repeat range.  
= For details, refer to Repeating play on this  
Viewing contents of upper folder  
Touching  
to display contents of the  
upper folder.  
p If the current folder is the ROOT folder,  
2
Touch [Random] in Function menu.  
Touching [Random] switches between [On]  
and [Off].  
is not displayed.  
Tracks will play in a random order within the  
previously selected [All] or [Folder].  
Advanced USB operation  
Scanning folders and tracks  
When the repeat play range is set to [Folder],  
the beginning of each track on the selected  
folder plays for about 10 seconds.  
When the repeat play range is set to [All], the  
beginning of all tracks in USB portable audio  
player/USB memory are played for about 10  
seconds.  
1
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
1
2
Select the repeat range.  
= For details, refer to Repeating play on the  
navigation system which differs from that de-  
scribed in the XM tuners operation manual.  
Only the logo data that is contained in the na-  
vigation DVD Map Disc can be displayed for  
each channel. The icon of a newly established  
channel that is not contained in the disc can-  
not be displayed. When no icon can be dis-  
played, the following substitute icon is  
displayed.  
Touch [Scan] in Function menu.  
Touching [Scan] switches between [On] and  
[Off].  
The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur-  
rent folder (or the first track of each folder) is  
played.  
Substitute icon  
3
When you find the desired track (or  
folder) touch [Scan] to turn scan play off.  
p After track or folder scanning is finished,  
normal playback of the tracks will begin  
again.  
p The logo data is not displayed during the  
memory navi mode.  
p The following functions are not available on  
the GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM.  
Switching the XM display  
p The following functions are not available on  
the GEX-P910XM.  
XM Tuner  
Using the MyMix function  
Using the direct traffic announcement  
function  
Selecting a channel from the XM chan-  
nel list display  
Listening to XM Satellite Radio  
All CH Mode  
1
2
3
5
6
4
p The following functions are not available on  
the GEX-P900XM.  
Using the MyMix function  
Using the direct traffic announcement  
function  
Selecting a channel from the XM chan-  
nel list display  
7
Selecting an XM channel directly  
Category Mode  
1 Source icon  
2 XM band indicator  
3 XM preset number indicator  
4 XM channel number indicator  
8
5 XM channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all  
channels in All CH Mode (or  
CH Number Mode), and select a channel  
from a selected category in  
You can use the navigation system to control  
an XM satellite digital tuner (e.g. GEX-  
P10XMT), which is sold separately.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
XM tuners operation manuals. This section  
provides information on XM operations with  
Category Mode.  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
Switching between the  
detailed information display  
and the preset list display  
6 XM channel category or XM channel in-  
formation  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
7 Detailed information or preset list dis-  
play  
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).  
Each touch of [Detail] (or [Preset]) changes  
the detail information display or preset list dis-  
play.  
8 Category icon  
1
Touch [XM] in AV Source screen to se-  
Detail information display  
(e.g. All CH Mode)  
lect the XM.  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
2
Touch [Band] to select an XM band.  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired XM  
band is displayed: XM1, XM2 or XM3.  
3
To perform tuning, touch  
The channels move up or down step by step. If  
you keep touching or , you can in-  
or  
.
crease or decrease channel number continu-  
ously. You can also perform manual tuning by  
pressing the o or p button.  
p You can also perform tuning within selected  
channel category.  
Preset list display  
(e.g. All CH Mode)  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Switching the XM channel  
select mode  
You can switch modes between the two meth-  
ods for selecting and listing channels.  
All CH Mode (or CH Number Mode):  
You can select a channel from all channels.  
Category Mode:  
Switching the XM display  
%
Touch [Disp].  
Each touch of [Disp] changes the information  
as follows:  
GEX-P900XM:  
Channel number Channel name Artist  
name/feature Song/program title Infor-  
mation  
You can select a channel within the selected  
category.  
GEX-P910XM:  
%
Touch [Mode] to select the desired  
Channel name Artist name/feature —  
Song/program title Channel category  
channel select mode.  
Touch [Mode] repeatedly to switch between  
the two modes.  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
button to continuously move up or down  
the channels in the category.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
If you touch any of the preset tuning keys  
Preset1 (or P1) Preset6 (or P6) you can ea-  
sily store up to six broadcast stations for later  
recall with the touch of a key.  
Selecting a channel from the  
XM channel list display  
The list content can be switched so you can  
search for the track you want to listen to not  
only by the channel name but also by the artist  
name or song title.  
1
Select the channel that you want to  
store in memory.  
2
3
Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.  
Keep touching a preset tuning key  
p The channel list shows all the channels  
during [All CH Mode], and the channels  
included in the selected category during  
[Category Mode]. To switch the channel  
mode, touch [Mode].  
Preset1 (or P1) Preset6 (or P6) until the  
XM preset number (e.g., P.CH 1) stops flash-  
ing.  
The number you have touched will flash in the  
XM preset number indicator and then remain  
lit. The selected station has been stored in  
memory.  
1
Touch [List].  
The XM channel list appears in the display.  
Each touch of [List] changes the settings as  
follows:  
The next time you touch the same preset tun-  
ing key Preset1 (or P1) Preset6 (or P6) the  
station is recalled from memory.  
Detail information display or Preset list  
display Ch Name List (Channel name) —  
Song Title List (Song title) —  
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM  
Artist Name List (Artist name)  
bands can be stored in memory.  
2
Touch the desired channel that you  
p You can also touch  
or  
to recall  
want to listen to.  
stations assigned to preset tuning keys  
Preset1 (or P1) Preset6 (or P6) in the de-  
tailed information display when the  
All CH Mode (or CH Number Mode)is  
selected.  
Selecting a channel in the  
channel category  
Press or to switch to the next page or the  
previous page.  
1
Touch [Mode] to select Category Mode.  
p In Category Mode, touch  
or  
2
Touch or to select the de-  
to switch to another category.  
sired category.  
You can also select the category by pressing  
the o or p button.  
3
Touch  
or  
to select the de-  
sired channel within the selected category.  
p When using the GEX-P10XMTor GEX-  
P920XM, press and hold the o or p  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
When the memorized track is broadcast  
Selecting an XM channel directly  
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.  
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen  
to that track.  
p If the memorized track is not selected in  
the MyMix list, no notification will be pro-  
vided even when that track is broadcast.  
p Notification may not be provided depend-  
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-  
tem.  
You can select an XM channel directly by en-  
tering the desired channel number.  
1
Touch [Direct].  
2
Touch 0 9 to input the desired chan-  
nel number.  
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
The entered XM channel is selected.  
p If there is slight difference between the  
memorized title and the title of the track  
being broadcast, no notification will be pro-  
vided even though they are the same song.  
4
Touch [Back].  
You can return to the previous display.  
Using the MyMix function  
The MyMix function memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being re-  
ceived. When a track that matches the memor-  
ized song title and artist name is being  
broadcast on a station other than the one you  
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you  
can switch the station to listen to that song.  
p A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only  
the song title and the artist name are mem-  
orized.  
Using the direct traffic  
announcement function  
You can listen to a memorized traffic channel  
by directly calling it up with the TRFC touch  
key.  
Memorize a traffic channel  
1
Tune in to a Traffic channel.  
2
Touch and hold [TRFC] for two seconds  
or more.  
Memorizing the song title and the  
artist name of a song  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized.  
The traffic channel will be memorized.  
p The channels 000 and 001 can not be mem-  
orized (although the channel 001 is the de-  
fault).  
%
Touch [Memo].  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to are memorized, and a confir-  
mation message appears.  
Calling up the memorized traffic channel  
%
Touch [TRFC].  
p You can also perform this operation by  
touching [TRAFFIC] in the AV source  
screen.  
p Up to 12 song titles and artist names can be  
memorized. Trying to save more than  
12 tracks will overwrite old ones.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is dis-  
played on the title information.  
p You can call up a traffic channel from  
sources other than XM.  
p To cancel traffic announcement, touch  
[TRFC Off].  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name of the channel 000.  
p There is a possibility the memorized title is  
not displayed correctly.  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
1
2
Touch [Memo] in Function menu.  
Touch the track you want to delete and  
Display the Radio ID  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-  
played.  
hold it for two seconds or more.  
That track will be deleted from the song title  
list.  
1
Touch [Direct].  
2
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
p To delete all of the memorized tracks, then  
If you select another channel, display of the  
[Delete All].  
Radio ID is canceled.  
3
A message will appear asking you to  
Display of the Radio ID repeats displaying  
[RADIO ID] and the ID code one after the  
other.  
confirm the deletion. Touch [Yes].  
p You can also display the Radio ID to select  
[RADIO ID] from channel category in  
Category Mode.  
Switching the alert setting  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing the condition of each memorized  
song.  
Advanced XM tuner operation  
1
2
Touch [Memo] in Function menu.  
Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].  
p Touch to toggle the selection.  
1
1 Function display  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each  
Setting the notification of  
memorized tracks  
The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix  
Function (MyMix list) is displayed. You can  
change the notification setting when the track  
is broadcast again. You can enable or disable  
notification for each track.  
1
Touch [Memo] in Function menu.  
2
Touch the song title that you want to  
exclude from the notification list.  
The check mark is removed, and the song title  
is excluded from the notification list.  
Deleting the memorized tracks  
You can delete each one of the memorized  
tracks from the song title list.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
Selecting team for game alert  
SIRIUS Tuner  
Listening to SIRIUS  
Displaying game information  
Using the song alert function  
Using the direct traffic announcement  
function  
All CH Mode  
1
2
3
5
4
Using the MyMix function  
1 Source icon  
2 SIRIUS band indicator  
3 SIRIUS preset number indicator  
4 SIRIUS channel number indicator  
6
5 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all  
channels in All CH Mode, and select a  
channel from the selected category in  
Category Mode.  
Category Mode  
7
6 Detailed information or preset list dis-  
play  
You can use the navigation system to control a  
Pioneer Sirius satellite digital tuner, which is  
sold separately.  
7 Category icon  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
SIRIUS tuners operation manuals. This sec-  
tion provides information on SIRIUS opera-  
tions with navigation system which differs  
from that described in the SIRIUS tuners op-  
eration manual.  
1
Touch [SIRIUS] in AV Source screen to  
select the SIRIUS tuner.  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
2
Touch [Band] to select a SIRIUS band.  
p When you use the SiriusConnect universal  
tuner (sold separately) with this Navigation  
System, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is  
required. For details concerning operation,  
refer to the owners manual of Pioneer SIR-  
IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect  
universal tuner.  
p The following function is not available if  
this navigation system is connected to the  
Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE CD-SB10  
and the SiriusConnect universal tuner.  
Using Instant Replay function  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired SIR-  
IUS band is displayed, SIRIUS1, SIRIUS2 or  
SIRIUS3.  
3
.
To perform tuning, touch  
or  
The channels move up or down. Channels that  
cannot currently be selected are skipped, and  
the next channel is selected. If you keep touch-  
ing  
or  
, you can increase or de-  
crease channel number continuously.  
You can also perform manual tuning by press-  
ing the o or p button.  
p The following functions are not available on  
the SIR-PNR1.  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
Preset list display  
(e.g. All CH Mode)  
Switching the SIRIUS channel  
select mode  
You can switch modes between the two meth-  
ods for selecting and listing channels.  
All CH Mode:  
You can select a channel from all channels.  
Category Mode:  
You can select a channel within selected cate-  
gory.  
SIRIUS channel information  
%
Touch [Mode] to select the desired  
channel select mode.  
Touch [Mode] repeatedly to switch between  
the two modes.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
If you touch any of the preset tuning keys  
Preset1 Preset6 to easily store up to six  
broadcast stations for later recall with the  
touch of a key.  
Switching between the  
detailed information display  
and the preset list display  
1
Select the channel that you want to  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
store in memory.  
2
3
Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.  
Keep touching a preset tuning key  
%
Touch [Detail] (or [Preset]).  
Each touch of [Detail] (or [Preset]) changes  
the detail information display or preset list dis-  
play.  
Preset1 Preset6 until the SIRIUS preset  
number (e.g., P.CH 1) stops flashing.  
The number you have touched will flash in the  
SIRIUS preset number indicator and then re-  
main lit. The selected station has been stored  
in memory.  
Detail information display  
(e.g. All CH Mode)  
The next time you touch the same preset tun-  
ing key Preset1 Preset6 the station is re-  
called from memory.  
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three SIRIUS  
bands can be stored in memory.  
p You can also touch  
or  
to recall  
stations assigned to preset tuning keys  
Preset1 Preset6 in the detailed informa-  
tion display when the All CH Modeis se-  
lected.  
Selecting a channel in the  
channel category  
1
Touch [Mode] to select Category Mode.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
2
Touch  
or  
to select the de-  
p A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only  
the song title and the artist name are mem-  
orized.  
sired category.  
p You can also select the category by pressing  
the o or p button.  
Memorizing the song title and the  
artist name of a song  
3
Touch  
or  
to select the de-  
sired channel within the selected category.  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized.  
Switching the display  
%
Touch [Memo].  
%
Touch [Disp].  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to are memorized, and a confir-  
mation message appears.  
Touching [Disp] changes the information as  
follows:  
Channel number Channel name Chan-  
nel category Artist name/feature Song/  
program title Composer  
p When using the SIR-PNR2, touch and hold  
[Disp] to switch the information scroll On/  
Off.  
p Up to 12 song titles and artist names can be  
memorized. Trying to save more than  
12 tracks will overwrite old ones.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is dis-  
played on the title information.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name of the channel 000.  
p There is a possibility the memorized title is  
not displayed correctly.  
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly  
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by  
entering the desired channel number.  
1
Touch [Direct].  
When the memorized track is broadcast  
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.  
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen  
to that track.  
2
Touch 0 9 to input the desired chan-  
nel number.  
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
p If the memorized track is not selected in  
the MyMix list, no notification will be pro-  
vided even when that track is broadcast.  
p Notification may not be provided depend-  
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-  
tem.  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
The entered SIRIUS channel is selected.  
4
Touch [Back].  
You can return to the previous display.  
p If there is slight difference between the  
memorized title and the title of the track  
being broadcast, no notification will be pro-  
vided even though they are the same song.  
Using the MyMix function  
The MyMix function memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being re-  
ceived. When a track that matches the memor-  
ized song title and artist name is being  
broadcast on a station other than the one you  
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you  
can switch the station to listen to that song.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
Using the direct traffic  
announcement function  
Advanced SIRIUS tuner operation  
You can listen to a memorized traffic channel  
by directly calling it up with the TRFC touch  
key.  
Memorize a traffic channel  
1
Tune in to a Traffic channel.  
1
2
Touch and hold [TRFC] for two seconds  
1 Function display  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each  
or more.  
The traffic channel will be memorized.  
p The channels 000 and 001 can not be mem-  
orized (although the channel 001 is the de-  
fault).  
Setting the notification of  
memorized tracks  
Display the song title list memorized for the  
MyMix Function (MyMix list). You can change  
the setting of the notification when the track is  
broadcast again. You can enable or disable no-  
tification for each track.  
Calling up the memorized traffic channel  
%
Touch [TRFC].  
p You can also perform this operation by  
touching [TRAFFIC] in the AV source  
screen.  
1
2
3
Touch [Memo] in Function menu.  
p You can call up a traffic channel from  
sources other than SIRIUS.  
p To cancel traffic announcement, touch  
[TRFC Off].  
Touch c or d to select the desired song.  
Touch [On / Off] to turn [On] the set-  
ting.  
p Touch [On / Off] again to turn the setting  
Display the Radio ID  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-  
played.  
[Off].  
Deleting the memorized tracks  
1
Touch [Direct].  
You can delete each one of the memorized  
tracks from the song title list.  
2
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
If you select another channel, display of the  
Radio ID is canceled.  
Display of the Radio ID repeats displaying  
[RADIO ID] and the ID code one after the  
other.  
p You can also display the Radio ID to select  
[RADIO ID] from channel category in  
Category Mode.  
1
Touch [Memo] in Function menu.  
2
Touch [Previous] or [Next] to select the  
song title that you want to delete.  
3
4
Touch [Delete].  
A message will appear asking you to  
confirm the deletion. Touch [Yes].  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
information and changes to the broadcast  
channel.  
p The Game Information function is available  
when Game Alert function is turned on.  
Switching the alert setting  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing the condition of each memorized  
song.  
1
Touch [Game Info] in Function menu.  
The game name and the broadcast channel  
are displayed.  
1
2
Touch [Memo] in Function menu.  
2
3
Touch [Tune To].  
p The game score will be updated automati-  
Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].  
p Touch to toggle the selection.  
cally.  
p When no game is currently being broad-  
cast, [NO GAME] is displayed.  
Selecting teams for Game Alert  
This navigation system can alert you when  
games involving your favorite sports teams are  
about to start. To use this function you need to  
store the teams you like to follow in advance.  
Touch c or d to see if any other games  
are playing.  
1
Touch [Game Alert] in Function menu.  
Hands-free Phoning  
2
gue.  
Touch c or d to select the desired lea-  
Hands-free phoning with  
cellular phones featuring  
Bluetooth technology  
3
Touch c or d to select the desired  
team.  
1
2
5
3
4
4
Touch [On / Off] to turn the setting  
[On].  
p Touch [On / Off] again to turn the setting  
[Off].  
Switching the Game Alert setting  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing the condition of each memorized  
team.  
6
(The screen when the registered phone is con-  
nected)  
If you use a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-  
BTB200) (sold separately), you can connect a  
cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless  
technology to this unit for hands-free, wireless  
calls, even while driving. For details concern-  
ing operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapters  
operation manual. This section provides brief  
information on the hands-free phoning opera-  
tions with this unit that slightly differs or is cut  
short from the operations described in the  
Bluetooth adapters operation manual.  
1
2
Touch [Game Alert] in Function menu.  
Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].  
p Touch to toggle the selection.  
Displaying Game Information  
An alert will be displayed when a game with  
the team you selected is about to start (or is  
currently playing). You can also display game  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
p Since this unit is always on standby to con-  
About the telephone source  
standby mode  
Once connected via Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology, this navigation system will remain on  
telephone source standby in the background  
while the connection is sustained. This means  
you can freely use the other functions of this  
system but still be ready to receive a call.  
nect with your cellular phones via Blue-  
tooth wireless technology, using this unit  
without running the engine can result in  
battery drainage.  
1 Source icon  
2 Device name indicator  
3 Signal level indicator  
p If the signal is not available, ( ) is dis-  
played.  
p Depending on the cellular phones featur-  
ing Bluetooth technology, this indicator  
may not show on the screen.  
4 Battery strength indicator  
p Battery strength indicator may differ  
from the actual battery strength.  
p Depending on the cellular phones featur-  
ing Bluetooth technology, this indicator  
may not show on the screen.  
Setting up for hands-free phoning  
Before you can use the hands-free phoning  
function you will need to set up the navigation  
system for use with your cellular phone. This  
entails establishing a Bluetooth wireless con-  
nection between the system and your phone,  
registering your phone with the system and  
adjusting the volume level.  
5 Missed call notice indicator  
6 Preset list display  
1
Connection  
Your phone should already be temporarily con-  
nected. However, to make best use of the func-  
tions, we recommend you register the phone  
to the navigation system.  
p This navigation systems phone call re-  
ception is always on standby when the  
ignition switch is set to ACC or ON.  
p The line-of-sight distance between this  
navigation system and your cellular  
phone must be 10 meters or less when  
sending and receiving voice and data via  
Bluetooth technology. However, the  
transmission distance may become  
shorter than the estimated distance, de-  
pending on the environment in use.  
p When BT-TEL is selected as a source,  
equalizer curves are automatically chan-  
ged to suitable settings for the phone  
source. When the source is changed or  
returned to another source, equalizer set-  
tings automatically return to the original  
settings.  
= For details, refer to Connecting a cellular  
2
Registration  
Register the phone to take full advantage of  
the features available with Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
= For details, refer to Registering your cellular  
3
Adjust the volume level  
Adjust the volume on your cellular phone and  
the navigation system for comfort.  
p The callers voice volume and ring volume  
may vary depending on the type of the cel-  
lular phone.  
p When BT-TEL is selected as a source,  
functions other than FAD/BAL are inop-  
erable in Sound menu.  
p If the difference between the ring volume  
and callers voice volume is large, the over-  
all volume level may become unstable.  
p Before disconnecting cellular phone from  
this navigation system, make sure to adjust  
the volume to a proper level.  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
Making a call by entering  
phone number  
The most basic way to make a call is to simply  
dial the number.  
1
Touch [BT-TEL] in AV Source screen to  
select the cellular phone source.  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
p The name (if registered on the phone book)  
and phone number are displayed.  
5
Touch  
to end the call.  
2
Touch [Direct].  
The direct dial screen appears.  
Making a call from the history list  
3
Touch the number keys to enter the  
The most recent calls made (dialled), received  
and missed are stored in the call history list.  
You can browse the call history list and call  
numbers from it.  
phone number.  
The input phone number is displayed below  
the device name.  
Input number  
p Up to 12 calls are stored in each list.  
p The call history is stored only when the re-  
gistered phone is connected to this naviga-  
tion system.  
1
Touch [Log].  
The history list screen appears.  
2
Touch [Log] to change the list.  
p Each touch of [Log] changes the lists as fol-  
lows:  
ADD +:  
Adds or deletes + before the phone number.  
:
Missed calls list Dialed calls list Re-  
ceived calls list  
p Touching or switches to the next or pre-  
vious page in the list.  
The input number is deleted letter by letter  
from the end of the number. Continuing to  
press deletes all of the numbers.  
Set:  
3
Touch the desired phone number.  
p Touching [ADD +] adds or deletes + be-  
fore the phone number.  
p Each touch of [ABC/123] changes the dis-  
play on the list between the name and the  
phone number.  
p If the name is not registered in the phone  
book [No Name] will be displayed.  
p If a incoming call number is not available to  
display, “–” will be appear instead of the  
number.  
Change to the preset dial list screen. You can  
assign the input number to the preset dial list.  
= For details, refer to Registering phone num-  
ESC:  
Return to the previous screen.  
4
Touch  
to make a call.  
p The estimated call time appears in the dis-  
play.  
p The estimated call time in the display may  
differ from the actual call time.  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
p Each touch of [ABC/123] changes the dis-  
play on the list between the name and the  
phone number.  
4
5
Touch  
to make a call.  
p The estimated call time appears in the dis-  
play.  
p The estimated call time in the display may  
differ from the actual call time.  
2
3
Touch  
to make a call.  
p The estimated call time appears in the dis-  
play.  
p The estimated call time in the display may  
differ from the actual call time.  
Touch  
to end the call.  
Making a call from the preset  
dial list  
Touch  
to end the call.  
You can easily store up to 6 phone numbers  
and later recall them with the touch of a preset  
key.  
Calling a number in the phone  
book  
After finding the entry in the phone book you  
want to call, you can select the number and  
make the call.  
Registering phone numbers to the  
preset dial list  
p Before using this function, you need to  
transfer the phone book in your cellular  
phone to this navigation system.  
1
Select or input a phone number you  
want to assign to the preset dial list.  
= For details, refer to Making a call by entering  
= For details, refer to Making a call from the  
1
Touch [PH.Book].  
= For details, refer to Calling a number in the  
The phone book list screen appears.  
2
Touch and hold one of preset keys P1 to  
P6 until the beep sounds.  
The selected phone number is stored in mem-  
ory. The next time you touch the same preset  
keys, the phone number is recalled from mem-  
ory.  
p If a phone number other than registered in  
the phone book is stored in the preset,  
[No Name] will be displayed.  
p If a phone book entry is edited after the  
entry is stored in the preset dial list, the edit  
will not be reflected to the list.  
p Touching or switches to the next or pre-  
vious page in the list.  
p You can search the phone book entry by al-  
phabet.  
2
call.  
Touch a phone book entry you want to  
Calling a number in the preset dial list  
1
Touch one of preset keys P1 to P6.  
The detailed list of the selected entry appears.  
The phone number registered to the selected  
preset key is displayed.  
p Touching [ADD +] adds or deletes + be-  
3
Touch a number you want to call.  
p Touching [ADD +] adds or deletes + be-  
fore the phone number.  
fore the phone number.  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
4
5
Touch  
to make a call.  
Making a call via voice recognition  
If your cellular phone features voice recogni-  
tion technology, you can make a call by voice  
commands.  
p This function is available only if your cellu-  
lar phone features voice recognition func-  
tion.  
p The estimated call time appears in the dis-  
play.  
p The estimated call time in the display may  
differ from the actual call time.  
Touch  
to end the call.  
p Operation varies depending on the type of  
your cellular phone. For more details con-  
cerning operation, refer to the instruction  
manual of your cellular phone.  
p This function can be operated only when  
the connection is established by HFP  
(Hands Free Profile).  
Searching the phone book entry by  
alphabet  
If there are many entries in the phone book  
list, it can be useful to display them in the al-  
phabetical order for easier searching.  
1
Touch [PH.Book].  
The phone book list screen appears.  
1
Touch [Voice].  
Voice recognition function of the cellular  
phone is now ready.  
p If your cellular phone does not feature voice  
recognition function, No voice dial appears  
in the display and operation is not available.  
2
Touch [Search].  
The phone book search screen appears.  
2
Pronounce the name of your contact.  
For more details concerning the voice recogni-  
tion operation, refer to your cellular phones  
instruction manual.  
3
Input the first letter of the entry in the  
phone book list you want to search, then  
touch [OK].  
The phone book list screen reappears. The  
search result is reflected, and the matched  
entry in the phone book list is displayed.  
p If no entry is found by the search,  
Taking a phone call  
Answering an incoming call  
Even when a source other than BT-TEL is se-  
lected, you can still answer an incoming call.  
1
When a call comes in, touch  
.
[No Data] is displayed and [OK] is inactive.  
p Touching [Clear] resets the search result  
and displays the original phone book list.  
The characters contained in [Next] in the  
phone book edit screen are treated in the  
same way as other alphabets when searching.  
For example, when you use such as [A], [a] or  
[Å] the result to come out is the same.  
The estimated call time appears in the display.  
p The estimated call time in the display may  
differ from the actual call time.  
p You can set this navigation system to auto-  
matically answering incoming calls.  
2
Touch  
to end the call.  
p You may hear a noise when you disconnect  
the phone.  
p You can also perform this operation by  
pressing PHONE button.  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
Answering call waiting  
Advanced hands-free phoning  
operation  
If a call comes in while you are talking on the  
phone, the number of the new caller appears  
in the display to signal that you have call wait-  
ing. You can put the first caller on hold while  
you answer the call waiting.  
1
Touch  
to answer call waiting.  
switches between callers  
2
Touching  
1
on hold.  
1 Function display  
3
Touch  
to end the call(s).  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each  
p When your cellular phone is not con-  
nected, you cannot select  
p Depending on the cellular phone that is  
connected to this navigation system via  
Bluetooth technology, the first caller will be  
kept on hold.  
p You can also answer and end call waiting  
by pressing PHONE button.  
[Phonebook Transfer] or  
[Clear Memory].  
p You can only select [Echo Cancel] while  
transmitting or receiving a call, or during  
conversation.  
Rejecting call waiting  
If you would rather not interrupt your current  
call to answer call waiting, you can reject it.  
Connecting a cellular phone  
%
Touch  
to reject call waiting.  
To use a phone wirelessly with the navigation  
system, it is necessary first to establish a con-  
nection using Bluetooth wireless technology.  
There are several ways you can do this.  
p Connection is normally established by HFP  
(Hands Free Profile), which gives you full  
control of functions available on the tele-  
phone source.  
p You can also reject call waiting by pressing  
and holding PHONE button.  
p The number you have rejected is not added  
to the call history list.  
Rejecting an incoming call  
You can reject an incoming call.  
= If you want to set this navigation system to  
automatically rejecting all incoming calls,  
However, in some cases when you make  
connection from your cellular phone, the  
connection may be made by HSP (Head  
Set Profile) and several functions may not  
be available.  
%
When a call comes in, touch  
.
p A phone may be connected via Bluetooth  
wireless technology but not yet registered  
with the navigation system. In this case it is  
said to be temporarily connected, and the  
available features are limited. To take full  
advantage of all the features available, we  
recommend you register your phone with  
this navigation system.  
The call is rejected.  
p You can also reject an incoming call by  
pressing and holding PHONE button.  
p The rejected call is recorded in missed call  
history list.  
= For details, refer to Making a call from the  
The limited features are:  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
Preset dial list  
Call history list  
Phone book  
Searching for available cellular phones  
You can have the navigation system search for  
any available phones in the area that have  
Bluetooth wireless technology, then select  
which one you want to connect to from a list  
displayed onscreen.  
= For details, refer to Registering your cellular  
p If [Auto Connect] is set to [On], cellular  
phone that has already been registered is  
connected automatically.  
1
Touch [Phone Connect] in Function  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Setting the automatic  
The phone connection menu screen appears.  
2
Touch [Search].  
Using a cellular phone to initiate a  
connection  
Putting the navigation system in Connection  
open mode allows you to establish a Bluetooth  
wireless connection from your cellular phone.  
When available cellular phones featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology are found, de-  
vice names are displayed.  
p While Searching, Searchis flash in the  
display.  
p If the navigation system fails to find any  
available cellular phones, Phone Not  
Foundis displayed.  
p Touching [Phone Name] changes the list  
between the device name and the BD ad-  
dress.  
1
Touch [Phone Connect] in Function  
menu.  
The phone connection menu screen appears.  
3
Touch a device name you want to con-  
nect.  
Connection to the cellular phone starts. When  
the connection is established, the device  
name of the connected cellular phone is dis-  
played.  
p To complete the connection, you may need  
to enter the PIN code (0000) on your cellu-  
lar phone.  
2
Touch [Connection Open].  
Pairingis flash in the display.  
3
Use a cellular phone to connect to the  
navigation system.  
= For details, refer to Editing the PIN code on  
Connection to the cellular phone starts. When  
the connection is established, the device  
name of the connected cellular phone is dis-  
played.  
Connecting to a registered cellular  
phone  
Once your phone is registered with the naviga-  
tion system, it is a simple matter to establish a  
Bluetooth wireless connection when a regis-  
tered phone is within range.  
p Operation varies depending on the type of  
your cellular phone. Refer to the instruction  
manual that came with your cellular phone  
for detailed instructions.  
p To complete the connection, please check  
the device name (Pioneer BT unit2) and  
enter the PIN code (0000) on your cellular  
phone.  
1
Touch [Phone Connect] in Function  
menu.  
The phone connection menu screen appears.  
= For details, refer to Editing the PIN code on  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
2
Touch [Direct Connect].  
Displaying BD (Bluetooth  
Device) address  
The registered phone list is displayed.  
Each device featuring Bluetooth technology is  
allocated a unique 48-bit device address. It  
consists of a 12-digit of hexadecimal string.  
This navigation system can display the BD ad-  
dress of your registered cellular phone featur-  
ing Bluetooth technology.  
3
Touch a device name you want to con-  
nect.  
Connection to the cellular phone starts. When  
the connection is established, the device  
name of the connected cellular phone is dis-  
played.  
1
Touch [Phone Connect] in Function  
menu.  
Registering your cellular phone  
The phone connection menu screen appears.  
You can register a phone that is temporarily  
connected to the navigation system in order to  
take full advantage of the features available  
with Bluetooth wireless technology. A total of  
five phones can be registered: three user cellu-  
lar phones and two guest phones. When regis-  
tered as a user phone, all the possible  
functions are available for use. When regis-  
tered as a guest phone, some functions are  
limited.  
2
Touch [Phone Name].  
The 12-digit hexadecimal string is displayed.  
p Without connecting, you cannot select  
[Phone Name]. Connect your cellular  
phone first.  
= For details, refer to Registering your cellular  
Disconnecting a cellular phone  
When you are done using your phone with the  
navigation system, you can close the Blue-  
tooth wireless connection.  
1
Touch [Phone Register] in Function  
menu.  
The phone register screen appears.  
1
Touch [Phone Connect] in Function  
1
2
3
4
5
menu.  
The phone connection menu screen appears.  
2
Touch [Disconnect].  
After the disconnection is completed,  
No Connectionis displayed.  
1 1:  
User phone 1  
2 2:  
User phone 2  
3 3:  
User phone 3  
4 G:  
Guest phone 1  
5 G:  
Deleting a registered phone  
If you no longer need to use a registered  
phone with the navigation system, you can de-  
lete it from the registration assignment to free  
it for another phone.  
p If a registered phone is deleted, all the  
phone book entries and call history lists  
correspond to the phone will be also  
cleared.  
Guest phone 2  
2
Touch and hold [1:] [3:] or [G:].  
When the registration is completed, the device  
name is displayed.  
120  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
p Hands-free phoning connection is discon-  
1
Touch [Phone Register] in Function  
nected to establish the connection for  
phone book transfer. The navigation system  
now ready to be transferred the phone book  
from the phone.  
menu.  
The phone register screen appears.  
2
Touch [Delete] on the right-hand side  
of the device name of the cellular phone  
you want to delete.  
2
Use cellular phone to perform phone  
book transfer.  
The deletion confirmation message appears.  
The phone book in the cellular phone is trans-  
ferred to the navigation system. Transfer pro-  
gress is displayed.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
The registered phone is deleted.  
p When not deleting a registered phone, se-  
lect [No].  
Number of completed transfers  
Transferring the phone book  
You can transfer the numbers in a registered  
user phones address book into the phone  
book.  
p If a guest phone is connected to this navi-  
gation system via Bluetooth technology,  
this function cannot be selected.  
p With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to transfer the entire phone book  
at once. In this case, transfer addresses  
one at a time from your phone book using  
your cellular phone.  
Completed is displayed when the phone book  
transfer is finished.  
p If all the phone book entries are not trans-  
ferred at a time, repeat Step 2 to transfer  
the phone book entries one by one.  
Changing the phone book  
display order  
You can choose to display the phone book  
sorted alphabetically by first name or family  
name.  
p The phone book can hold a total of 500 en-  
tries;  
User phone 1: 300 entries  
User phone 2: 150 entries  
User phone 3: 50 entries  
p Each entry can hold up to 5 phone num-  
bers.  
p This function is available while the regis-  
tered phone is connected.  
p Depending on the cellular phone that is  
connected to this navigation system via  
Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-  
tem may not be able to display the phone  
book correctly. (Some characters may be  
garbled.)  
p If the phone book in the cellular phone con-  
tains image data, phone book may not be  
correctly transferred.  
%
Touch [Phonebook Name View] in  
Function menu.  
Touching [Phonebook Name View] switches  
between [Invert] and [Original].  
p If a phone book entry is edited, the display  
order of first name and family name will not  
be changed.  
p With some cellular phones, this feature  
may not be possible.  
1
Touch [Phonebook Transfer] in Function  
menu.  
The phonebook transfer screen appears.  
121  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
:
Editing the phone book  
The input number is deleted letter by letter  
from the end of the numbers. Continuing to  
press deletes all of the numbers.  
You can edit the phone numbers or names re-  
gistered in the phone book.  
1
Touch [PH.Book].  
OK:  
The phone book list screen appears.  
p Touching or switches to the next or pre-  
vious page in the list.  
The change is fixed, and the phone book edit  
screen reappears.  
p You can search the phone book alphabeti-  
cally.  
Name edit screen  
You can input letters or numbers.  
2
Touch a phone book entry you want to  
edit.  
The detailed list of the selected entry appears.  
3
Touch [Edit] on the right-hand side of  
the phone number or the name of the in-  
formation you want to edit.  
Next:  
Each touch of [Next] changes the characters  
that can be input as follows:  
Upper case letters lower case letters —  
upper case symbols lower case symbols  
:
The input text is deleted letter by letter from  
the end of the text. Continuing to press deletes  
all of the text.  
The phone number edit screen or the name  
edit screen appears.  
OK:  
4
Input the text or number.  
The change is fixed and the phone book edit  
screen reappears.  
p Each name can be input 16 characters  
long.  
Phone number edit screen  
You can input numbers.  
Clearing memory  
You can clear the memory of each item that  
corresponds to the connected cellular phone:  
phone book, dialled/received/missed call his-  
tory list and preset dials.  
ADD +:  
1
Touch [Clear Memory] in Function  
Adds or deletes + before the phone number.  
menu.  
The clear memory screen appears.  
122  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
2
Touch [Clear] on the right-hand side of  
Setting the automatic rejecting  
If this function is on, the navigation system  
automatically rejects all incoming calls.  
the item that you want to clear memory  
for.  
%
Touch [Refuse All Calls] in Function  
menu.  
Touching [Refuse All Calls] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
p If both the automatic reject and automatic  
answer functions are set to [On], automatic  
reject is prioritized and all incoming calls  
are automatically rejected.  
p If the [Refuse All Calls] is set to [On], re-  
jected incoming calls will not be stored in  
the missed call list.  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
Phonebook:  
You can clear the registered phone book.  
Dialled Calls:  
You can clear the dialed call history list.  
Setting a ring tone  
The navigation system offers to turn the ring  
tone for incoming calls on or off.  
p The ring tone you select for this navigation  
system has no effect on the ring tone used  
by your phone. If you do not want your  
phone and this navigation system to ring at  
the same time, we recommend you turn  
the ring tone off for one or the other.  
Received Calls:  
You can clear the received call history list.  
Missed Calls:  
You can clear the missed call history list.  
Preset Dials:  
You can clear the registered preset dials.  
p Touching [Clear] displays the confirmation  
message for clearing the memory.  
p Touching [Clear All] clears all the data that  
correspond to the connected cellular  
phone.  
%
Touch [Ring Tone] in Function menu.  
Touching [Ring Tone] switches between [On]  
and [Off].  
3
Touch [Yes].  
Data on the selected item is cleared from this  
navigation systems memory.  
p If you do not want to clear memory that you  
Setting the automatic connection  
When automatic connection is active, the na-  
vigation system will automatically establish a  
connection with a registered phone when it  
comes into range. Using this feature will re-  
lease you from all of the processes for estab-  
lishing a connection.  
p With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to perform automatic connection.  
p While you are operating in Function menu  
of hands-free phoning, this unit does not  
initiate an automatic connection to your re-  
gistered phone.  
have selected, touch [No].  
Setting the automatic answering  
If you set the automatic answering function  
on, the navigation system automatically an-  
swers all incoming calls.  
%
Touch [Auto Answer] in Function menu.  
Touching [Auto Answer] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
123  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
%
menu.  
Touch [Auto Connect] in Function  
iPod  
You can control an iPod by combining the In-  
terface cable for iPod (CD-I200) (sold sepa-  
rately) to the navigation system. For details  
concerning operation, refer to the iPods own-  
ers manual.  
Touching [Auto Connect] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
p Automatic connection is performed in the  
registration number order.  
Echo canceling and noise reduction  
Operating the iPod  
Music  
When you are operating hands-free phoning  
in the vehicle, you may hear an undesired  
echo. This function reduces the undesired  
echo and noise while you are doing hands-free  
phoning, and maintains a certain sound qual-  
ity.  
1
%
Touch [Echo Cancel].  
Touching [Echo Cancel] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
2
6
5
3, 7  
4
= For details, refer to Advanced iPod operation  
p Some functions cannot be reproduced de-  
pending on the generation of the iPod.  
p If the error occurs when an iPod with video  
compatibilities is connected to the naviga-  
tion system, the icon  
is displayed.  
p o and p buttons on the hardware are  
the same function as o and p in the  
screen.  
1 Source icon  
2 Track number indicator  
3 Play time indicator  
4 Chapter indicator  
When the source with chapters played, the  
indicator appears.  
5 Repeat/Shuffle indicator  
The marks shown below indicate the current  
playback status.  
: All-tracks repeat  
: One-track repeat  
124  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
: Shuffle  
1
Touch one of the categories in which  
you want to search for a song.  
6 Song title, Artist name and Album title  
indicator  
Displays the song title, artist name and  
album title.  
: Song title  
!
!
!
!
!
Playlists (playlists)  
Genres (genres)  
Artists (artists)  
Albums (albums)  
Podcasts (podcasts)  
: Artist name  
: Album title  
7 Play time bar  
Touch panel key operation (MUSIC)  
1
tem.  
Connect the iPod to the navigation sys-  
The search screen is displayed.  
p When connected to an iPod that can han-  
dle podcasts, you can search by podcast.  
p When you select Artists, Albums, or  
Genres keep touching one of the list in the  
category makes the songs in the list as a  
playlist and start playing.  
2
Touch [iPod] in AV Source screen to se-  
lect the iPod.  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
3
Touch f.  
Play of the current track pauses.  
p To resume playback at the same point that  
2
3
Touch the item you want to refine.  
p Refine the item until the track title is dis-  
played on the list.  
you turned pause on, touch f again.  
4
To skip backward or forward to another  
From the track list, touch the track you  
track, touch o or p.  
want to play.  
Touching p skips to the start of the next  
track. Touching o once skips to the start of  
the current track. Touching again will skip to  
the previous track.  
When the track with chapters played, touching  
p skips to the start of the next chapter.  
Touching o once skips to the start of the  
current chapter. Touching again will skip to  
the previous chapter.  
p To go to the next track list, touch  
p To return to the previous track list, touch  
p When iPod operation screen appears after  
selecting a song, touch [MENU] to display  
the previous playlist.  
.
.
Performing random play with  
one touch  
All of the selected songs can be played at ran-  
dom by only touching one key.  
5
To perform fast backward or forward,  
keep touching o or p.  
%
Touch [Shuffle All].  
To cancel the random play, switch [Shuffle] to  
Browsing for a song  
[Off] in Function menu.  
The operations of this navigation system for  
controlling an iPod are designed to imitate  
iPod operation. This allows you to search and  
play songs as you would with an iPod.  
125  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
5
To skip back or forward to another  
Touch panel key operation (VIDEO)  
video, touch o or p.  
This navigation system can play video if an  
iPod with video capabilities is connected.  
p Change the video setting on the iPod so  
that the iPod can output the video to an ex-  
ternal device, before you display the video  
screen.  
Touching p skips to the start of the next  
video. Touching o once skips to the start of  
the current video. Touching again will skip to  
the previous video.  
When the video with chapters played, touch-  
ing p skips to the start of the next chapter.  
Touching o once skips to the start of the  
current chapter. Touching again will skip to  
the previous chapter.  
p For details concerning setting and opera-  
tion, refer to the iPods owners manual.  
1
Touch [VIDEO].  
Touch [MUSIC] in step 2 to return to the music  
operation screen.  
6
To perform fast rewind or forward,  
keep touching o or p.  
If you keep touching o or p for five sec-  
onds, fast rewind/ fast forward continues even  
if you release o or p. To resume playback  
at a desired point, touch f, o or p.  
2
Touch one of the categories in that con-  
tains the video you want to play.  
Advanced iPod operation  
3
Touch the screen to display to touch  
panel keys.  
1
1 Function display  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each  
p To return to the category selection screen,  
touch [Top Menu].  
Repeating play  
There are two repeat play types for the iPod:  
One (one-track repeat) and All (all-tracks re-  
peat).  
p When iPod operation screen appears after  
selecting a video, touch [MENU] to display  
the previous playlist.  
%
Touch [Repeat] in Function menu.  
4
Touch f.  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the settings  
Play of the current video pauses.  
as follows:  
p To resume playback at the same point that  
!
!
One Repeat just the current track  
All Repeat all tracks in the selected list  
you turned pause on, touch f again.  
126  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
Shuffle play  
This function shuffles tracks or albums and  
plays them in random order.  
Bluetooth Audio  
Listening to songs on BT Audio  
(Bluetooth audio player)  
%
Touch [Shuffle] in Function menu.  
1
2
Each touch of [Shuffle] changes the settings  
as follows:  
!
!
!
Off Does not shuffle.  
Songs Shuffles tracks.  
Albums Shuffles albums.  
p When you set [Albums], the albums are  
shuffled but the tracks in the album will not  
be shuffled. (The tracks in the album will be  
played from the first track.)  
If you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-  
BTB200) (sold separately) to this unit, you can  
control a Bluetooth audio player via Bluetooth  
wireless technology. For details concerning  
operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapters op-  
eration manual. This section provides brief in-  
formation on Bluetooth audio player  
operations with this unit that slightly differs or  
is cut short from the operations described in  
the Bluetooth adapters operation manual.  
p Even if your audio player does not contain  
a Bluetooth module, you can still control it  
from this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology. To control your audio player by  
using this unit, connect a product featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology (available on  
the market) to your audio player and con-  
nect Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200) to  
this unit.  
Wide Screen  
If the video is compatible with wide screen for-  
mat, set [Wide Screen] setting to [On] in  
order to view the video image in wide screen.  
%
Touch [Wide Screen] in Function menu.  
Touching [Wide Screen] switches between  
[On] or [Off].  
p When you select the video after setting  
[Wide Screen], display size is changed.  
Turning on or off charging for  
the iPod  
The iPod charging setting can be turned on or  
off. If the video from an iPod with video cap-  
abilities seems fuzzy, turning off the charging  
setting may improve the video quality.  
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player  
connected to this navigation system, the  
available operations with this navigation  
system are limited to the following two le-  
vels:  
%
Touch [iPod Charge] in Function menu.  
Touching [iPod Charge] switches between  
[On] or [Off].  
Lower level: Only playing back songs on  
your audio player is possible.  
Higher level: Playing back, pausing, se-  
lecting songs, etc., are possible (all the  
operations illustrated in this manual).  
127  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
a Bluetooth wireless connection. (Refer to  
p Since there are a number of Bluetooth  
audio players available on the market, op-  
erations with your Bluetooth audio player  
using this navigation system vary greatly in  
range. Please refer to the instruction man-  
ual that came with your Bluetooth audio  
player as well as this manual while operat-  
ing your player on this navigation system.  
p Information about songs (e.g. the elapsed  
playing time, song title, song index, etc.)  
cannot be displayed on this navigation sys-  
tem.  
p While you are listening to songs on your  
Bluetooth audio player, please refrain from  
operating your cellular phone as much as  
possible. If you try operating on your cellu-  
lar phone, the signal from your cellular  
phone may cause a noise on the song play-  
back.  
p When you are talking on the cellular phone  
connected to this navigation system via  
Bluetooth wireless technology, the song  
playback from your Bluetooth audio player  
connected to this navigation system is  
muted.  
p Even if you switch to another source while  
listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio  
player, the playback of song continues to  
elapse.  
2
Touch d.  
Playback starts.  
3
To skip back or forward to another  
track, touch o or p.  
Touching p skips to the start of the next  
track. Touching o once skips to the start of  
the current track. Touching it again will skip to  
the previous track.  
4
To perform fast forward or reverse,  
keep touching o or p.  
5
To stop playback, touch g.  
Pausing track playback  
Pause lets you temporarily stop track play-  
back.  
%
Touch e.  
Play of the current track pauses.  
p To resume playback at the same point that  
you turned pause on, touch e again.  
Advanced BT-Audio operation  
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player  
you connected to this navigation system,  
operations on this navigation system to  
control the player may differ from those ex-  
plained in this manual.  
1 Source icon  
2 Device name  
1
Touching [Name] switches between equip-  
ment name and BD address.  
1 Function display  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each  
1
Touch [BT-AUDIO] in AV Source screen  
to select the Bluetooth audio source.  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
p For this navigation system to control your  
Bluetooth audio player it needs to establish  
128  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
08  
Connecting a Bluetooth audio  
player  
External Unit  
Operating the external unit  
%
Touch [Connection Open] in Function  
1
2
menu to turn the connection open on.  
Pairing is displayed. This navigation system is  
now on standby for connection from Bluetooth  
audio player.  
If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for  
Bluetooth wireless connection, the connection  
to this navigation system will be automatically  
established.  
p Before you can use audio players you may  
need to enter the PIN code into this naviga-  
tion system. If your player requires a PIN  
code to establish a connection, look for the  
code on the player or in its accompanying  
documentation. Enter the PIN code refer-  
ring to page 119.  
The term external unitrefers to a Pioneer  
product (such as one available in the future)  
that, although incompatible as a source, en-  
ables control of basic functions by the naviga-  
tion system. Two external units can be  
controlled by the navigation system. When  
two external units are connected, the naviga-  
tion system allocates them to external unit 1  
or external unit 2.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
external units operation manual. This section  
provides information on external unit opera-  
tions with the navigation system that differ  
from those described in the external units op-  
eration manual.  
Disconnecting a Bluetooth  
audio player  
%
Touch [Disconnect] in Function menu.  
After the disconnection is completed,  
No Connection is displayed.  
p Operation varies depending on the external  
unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-  
nal unit may not respond.)  
Displaying BD (Bluetooth  
Device) address  
%
Touch [Device Info] in Function menu to  
1 Source icon  
display the BD address.  
2 External unit indicator  
Various information regarding the Bluetooth  
wireless technology are displayed.  
1
Touch [EXT-1] or [EXT-2] in AV Source  
!
!
!
!
BD ADDRESS (system address)  
SYSTEM NAME (system name)  
SYSTEM VER. (version)  
BT MODULE VER. (Bluetooth module  
version)  
screen to select the external unit.  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each Menu  
2
Touch any touch panel key to operate  
the external unit.  
129  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)  
Operate the external unit by  
using 1 KEY 6 KEY  
The external unit can be operated by transmit-  
ting the operating commands set to 1 KEY —  
6 KEY.  
p Operation varies depending on the external  
unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-  
nal unit may not respond.)  
AV Input (AV)  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, video images cannot be  
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view  
video images, you must stop in a safe place and  
apply the parking brake (refer to Parking brake in-  
%
Touch desired key ([1 KEY] [6 KEY])  
Selecting AV as the source  
to operate the external unit.  
%
Touch [AV-1] or [AV-2] in the AV Source  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
Operate the external unit by  
using F1 F4  
p If you want to switch AV source, select  
[Video] in [AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input].  
= For details, refer to Setting the video input  
The external unit can be operated by transmit-  
ting the operating commands set to F1 F4.  
p The operating commands set to F1 F4  
vary depending on the external unit.  
p Some functions may not be used until you  
touch and hold the key.  
%
Touch [F1] [F4].  
The operation command is transmitted to the  
external unit.  
Switching the automatic and  
manual function  
You can turn automatic and manual function  
on or off.  
You can switch between Auto and Manual  
functions of the external unit connected.  
Initially, this function is set to Auto.  
p Operating commands set for Auto and  
Manual operations vary depending on the  
external unit connected.  
%
Touch [A/M].  
Touching [A/M] switches between [Auto] and  
[Manual].  
130  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
09  
Various settings are available with the audio  
Equalizer curve  
source according to your audiovisual requests.  
This chapter describes the methods of chan-  
ging the various settings and how to set of the  
LCD panel.  
S.Bass  
S.Bass is a curve in which only low-pitched sound is  
boosted.  
Powerful  
Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-  
pitched sounds are boosted.  
Audio Adjustments  
Introduction to audio adjustments  
Natural  
Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-  
pitched sounds are slightly boosted.  
Vocal  
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the  
human vocal range, is boosted.  
Flat  
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.  
Custom1  
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate.  
1
Custom2  
1 Sound display  
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate.  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each  
p Only when the subwoofer controller set-  
ting is [Preout] [Full], [Non Fading] will  
be displayed instead of [Sub Woofer].  
1
Touch [EQ Menu] in Sound menu.  
2
Select the desired equalizer curve.  
p [Custom1] and [Custom2] are adjusted  
equalizer curves.  
p When [Flat] is selected, no supplement or  
correction is made to the sound. This is  
useful to check the effect of the equalizer  
curves by switching alternatively between  
[Flat] and a set equalizer curve.  
p When selecting the FM tuner as the  
source, you cannot switch to [SLA].  
Using the equalizer  
The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization  
to match vehicle interior acoustic characteris-  
tics as desired.  
Using balance adjustment  
You can select a fader/balance setting that  
provides an ideal listening environment in all  
occupied seats.  
Recalling equalizer curves  
There are seven stored equalizer curves which  
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list  
of the equalizer curves:  
1
Touch [FAD/BAL] in Sound menu.  
When the rear output setting is [Rear SP]  
[Sub. W], [Balance] will be displayed instead  
of [FAD/BAL].  
131  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
09  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
2
Touch a or b to adjust front/rear  
!
!
Level:  
speaker balance.  
You can select the decibel (dB) level of the  
selected EQ.  
Q:  
You can select the details of the curve char-  
acteristics.  
Each time you touch a or b moves the front/  
rear speaker balance towards the front or the  
rear.  
Front:15 to Rear:15 is displayed as the front/  
rear speaker balance moves from front to rear.  
Both Front:0 and Rear:0 are the proper set-  
ting when only two speakers are used.  
When the rear output setting is Rear SP  
Sub. W, you cannot adjust front/rear speaker  
balance.  
1
2
3
Touch [EQ Menu] in Sound menu.  
Touch [Customize].  
Touch c or d to select the equalizer  
band to adjust.  
Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer  
bands in the following order:  
Low Mid High  
3
Touch c or d to adjust left/right speak-  
er balance.  
4
Touch c or d to select the desired fre-  
Each time you touch c or d moves the left/  
right speaker balance towards the left or the  
right.  
Left:9 to Right:9 is displayed as the left/right  
speaker balance moves from left to right.  
quency.  
Touch c or d until the desired frequency ap-  
pears in the display.  
Low: 40 80 100 160 (Hz)  
Mid: 200 500 1K 2K (Hz)  
High: 3.15K 8K 10K 12.5K (Hz)  
Adjusting equalizer curves  
5
Touch c or d to adjust the level of the  
equalizer band.  
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer  
curve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer  
curve settings are memorized in Custom1.  
p If you make Custom2 adjustments,  
Custom2 curve is updated.  
Each time you touch c or d increases or de-  
creases the level of the equalization band. +12  
to -12 is displayed as the level is increased or  
decreased.  
p You can adjust the center frequency, level  
and the Q factor (curve characteristics) of  
each currently selected curve band (Low/  
Mid/High).  
6
Touch c or d to select the desired Q  
factor.  
Touch c or d until the desired Q factor ap-  
pears in the display.  
Wide2 Wide1 Narrow1 Narrow2  
p If you make adjustments, Custom1 curve is  
updated.  
Setting the simulated sound stage  
You can select the desired effect from various  
simulated sound stage, such as Music Studio  
or Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a lis-  
tener positioning effect.  
!
!
Band:  
You can select the equalizer band.  
Frequency:  
You can select which frequency to be set as  
the center frequency.  
132  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
09  
1
Touch [Sub Woofer] in Sound menu.  
Setting a stage that fits your image  
When [Preout] (the subwoofer controller set-  
ting in Initial menu) is [Sub. W], you can se-  
lect [Sub Woofer].  
1
Touch [Staging] in Sound menu.  
2
Touch the desired stage setting.  
p The [Living Room] setting that emphasizes  
midrange sound hardly has any effect near  
the maximum volume level.  
p When you set staging other than [Off], the  
high pass filter (HPF) setting turns [Off].  
= For details, refer to Using the high pass filter  
2
Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output  
on.  
To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].  
3
Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select  
the phase of subwoofer output.  
Adjusting a position effect  
You can select a listener position that you  
want to make as the center of sound effects.  
4
Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the output  
level of the subwoofer.  
+6 to -6 is displayed as the level is increased  
or decreased.  
1
2
3
Touch [Staging] in Sound menu.  
Touch [Position].  
5
Touch c or d to select cut-off fre-  
quency.  
Touch the desired position.  
Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre-  
quencies in the following order:  
50 80 125 (Hz)  
Only frequencies lower than those in the se-  
lected range are output from the subwoofer.  
Adjusting loudness  
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the  
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.  
1
Touch [Loudness] in Sound menu.  
Using non fading output  
When the non fading output setting is on, the  
audio signal does not pass through navigation  
systems low pass filter (for the subwoofer),  
but is output through the RCA output.  
2
Touch [On] to turn loudness on.  
To turn loudness off, touch [Off].  
Touch c or d to select a desired level.  
3
Each time you touch c or d selects level in  
the following order:  
Low Mid High  
1
Touch [Non Fading] in Sound menu.  
Only when [Preout] (the subwoofer controller  
setting in Initial menu) is [Full], you can select  
[Non Fading].  
Using subwoofer output  
This navigation system is equipped with a sub-  
woofer output which can be turned on or off.  
p When the subwoofer output is on, you can  
adjust the cut-off frequency, the output  
level and the phase of the subwoofer.  
2
Touch [On] to turn non fading output  
on.  
To turn non fading output off, touch [Off].  
3
Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the output  
level of the non fading.  
+6 to -6 is displayed as the level is increased  
or decreased.  
133  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
09  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
Using the high pass filter  
Setting Up the DVD/DivX  
Player  
When you do not want low sounds from the  
subwoofer output frequency range to play  
from the front or rear speakers, turn HPF (high  
pass filter) on. Only frequencies higher than  
those in the selected range are output from  
the front or rear speakers.  
Configure the DVD/DivX player.  
DVD/DivX Setup adjustments  
1
Touch [HPF] in Sound menu.  
2
Touch [On] to turn high pass filter on.  
To turn high pass filter off, touch [Off].  
3
Touch c or d to select cut-off fre-  
quency.  
1
Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre-  
quencies in the following order:  
50 80 125 (Hz)  
When [Preout] (the subwoofer controller set-  
ting in Initial menu) is [Sub. W], HPF function  
is effective for front speakers only.  
1 DVD/DivX setup menu display  
1
Play the disc that contains DVD-Video  
or DivX.  
2
Press MENU button to change to AV  
MENU.  
Adjusting source levels  
3
4
5
Touch [Function].  
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust  
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-  
dical changes in volume when switching be-  
tween sources.  
Touch [DVD/DivX Setup].  
Touch the desired function.  
p Settings are based on the FM tuner volume  
level, which remains unchanged.  
Setting the language  
You can set a desired subtitle, audio and  
menu language. If the selected language is re-  
corded on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu  
are displayed in that language.  
1
Compare the FM tuner volume level  
with the level of the source you wish to ad-  
just.  
2
3
Touch [SLA] in Sound menu.  
1
Touch [Language] and then touch  
Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the source vo-  
[Subtitle Language], [Audio Language] or  
[Menu Language].  
lume.  
+4 to -4 is displayed as the source volume is  
increased or decreased.  
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-  
rently set language is selected.  
Sources are set to same source level adjust-  
ment volume automatically.  
2
Touch the desired language.  
When you select [Others], a language code  
input display is shown. Input the four digit  
code of the desired language then touch  
[Enter].  
!
!
!
!
CD, ROM, DivX, S-DVD and M-DVD  
EXT-1 and EXT-2  
AV-1 and AV-2  
XM and SIRIUS  
134  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
09  
p When using a regular display, select either  
Letter Box or Panscan. Selecting 16:9 may  
result in an unnatural picture.  
p If you select the TV aspect, navigation sys-  
tems display changes to the same setting.  
p If the selected language is not recorded on  
the disc, the default language specified on  
the disc is output and displayed.  
p You can also switch the subtitle and audio  
language by touching [S.Title] or [Audio]  
during playback.  
= For details, refer to Changing the subtitle  
= For details, refer to Changing audio system  
p Even if you use [S.Title] or [Audio] to  
switch the subtitle or audio language, this  
does not affect the settings here.  
%
Touch [TV Aspect].  
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
16:9 Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-  
played as it is (initial setting)  
Letter Box The picture is in the shape of  
a letter box with black bands at the top and  
bottom of the screen  
!
Panscan The picture is cut short at the  
right and left of the screen  
p When playing discs that do not specify  
Panscan, playback is with Letter Box even  
if you select Panscan setting. Confirm  
whether the disc package bears the  
Setting assist subtitles on or off  
16 : 9 LB  
mark. (Refer to What the Marks on  
Assist subtitles offer explanations for the au-  
rally impaired. However, they are only dis-  
played if they are recorded on the DVD.  
You can turn assist subtitles on or off as de-  
sired.  
p Some discs do not enable changing of the  
TV aspect. For details, refer to the discs in-  
structions.  
%
Touch [Assist Subtitle].  
Setting the parental lock  
Touching [Assist Subtitle] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental  
lock to restrict the viewing of violent and adult  
oriented scenes by children. You can set the  
parental lock level in steps as desired.  
p When you set a parental lock level and then  
play a disc featuring parental lock, code  
number input indications may be dis-  
Setting angle icon display  
You can set to display the angle icon on  
scenes where the angle can be switched.  
%
Touch [Multi Angle].  
played. In this case, playback will begin  
when the correct code number is input.  
Touching [Multi Angle] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
Setting the code number and level  
Setting the aspect ratio  
When you first use this function, register your  
code number. If you do not register a code  
number, parental lock will not operate.  
There are two kinds of display. A wide screen  
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)  
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect  
of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect  
for the display connected to REAR OUT  
(VIDEO OUT).  
1
2
Touch [Parental].  
Touch [Parental].  
135  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
09  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
3
Touch [0] [9] to input a four digit  
%
Touch [DivX VOD].  
code number.  
Your 8-digit registration code is displayed.  
p Make a note of the code as you will need it  
when you register with a DivX VOD provider.  
4
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
The code number is registered, and you can  
now set the level.  
Setting the Auto Play  
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,  
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-  
cally and start playback from the first chapter  
of the first title.  
p This function is available for DVD-Video.  
p Some DVDs may not operate properly. If  
this function is not fully operated, turn this  
function off and start playback.  
5
Touch any of [1] [8] to select the de-  
sired level.  
The parental lock level is set.  
!
!
Level 8 Playback of the entire disc is  
possible (initial setting)  
Level 7 Level 2 Playback of discs for  
children and non-adult oriented discs is  
possible  
!
Level 1 Playback of discs for children  
only is possible  
%
Touch [Auto Play].  
Touching [Auto Play] switches between [On]  
and [Off].  
p If you want to change the parental level,  
enter the registered code number in the  
Step 2.  
p When Auto Play is [On], you cannot oper-  
ate repeating play of DVD disc.  
= For details, refer to Repeating play on  
p We recommend to keep a record of your  
code number in case you forget it.  
p The parental lock level is recorded on the  
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the  
disc package, included literature or on the  
disc itself. With discs that do not feature a  
recorded parental lock level, you cannot  
use parental lock.  
p With some discs, parental lock operates to  
skip certain scenes only, after which normal  
playback resumes. For details, refer to the  
discs instructions.  
Setting the Subtitle File  
You can select whether to display DivX exter-  
nal subtitles or not.  
p The DivX subtitles will be displayed even  
when [On] is selected if no DivX external  
subtitle files exist.  
= For details, refer to DivX subtitle files on  
p If you forget the registered code number,  
touch [Clear] 10 times on the screen in the  
Step 2. The registered code number is can-  
celed, letting you register a new one.  
%
Touch [Subtitle File].  
Touching [Subtitle File] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
p Up to 42 characters can be displayed on  
one line. If more than 42 characters are set,  
the line breaks and the characters are dis-  
played on the next line.  
p Up to 126 characters can be displayed on  
one screen. If more than 126 characters are  
set, the excess characters will not be dis-  
played.  
Displaying your DivX® VOD  
registration code  
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)  
content on this navigation system, you first  
need to register the unit with your DivX VOD  
content provider. You do this by generating a  
DivX VOD registration code, which you submit  
to your provider.  
136  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
09  
p The DivX subtitles will be displayed even  
when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-  
responding subtitle files exist.  
p Up to three lines can be displayed at  
once.  
Rear SP Full is selected), you can connect the  
RCA subwoofer output to a subwoofer. In this  
case, you can select whether to use the sub-  
woofer controllers (low pass filter, phase)  
built-in Preout Sub. W or the auxiliary  
Preout Full.  
p When 5.1CH setting is [On], the rear out-  
put and subwoofer setting is not available.  
Initial Settings  
1
Touch [Rear SP] in Initial menu.  
Adjusting initial settings  
2
Touch [Rear SP] to switch the rear out-  
put setting.  
When no subwoofer is connected to the rear  
output, select Full.  
When a subwoofer is connected to the rear  
output, select Sub. W.  
p When the rear output setting is Sub. W,  
you cannot change the subwoofer control-  
ler.  
1
Initial settings lets you perform initial set up of  
different settings for navigation system.  
3
Touch [Preout] to switch the subwoofer  
1 Function display  
output or non fading output.  
p Even if you change this setting, there is no  
output unless you turn [Non Fading] or  
[Sub Woofer] in Sound menu [On].  
= For details, refer to Using non fading output  
1
Touch [Off] in AV Source screen to turn  
source off.  
= For details, refer to Selecting an AV source  
= For details, refer to Using subwoofer output  
2
Press MENU button to change to AV  
MENU.  
p If you change the subwoofer controller  
(Rear SP), the subwoofer output  
(Sub Woofer) and non fading output  
(Non Fading) in Sound menu return to the  
factory settings.  
p Both rear speaker leads output and RCA  
rear output are switched simultaneously in  
this setting.  
3
Touch [Initial].  
Setting the rear output and  
subwoofer controller  
This navigation systems rear output (rear  
speaker leads output and RCA rear output)  
can be used for full-range speaker  
(Rear SP Full) or subwoofer (Rear SP Sub. W)  
connection. If you switch the rear output set-  
ting to Rear SP Sub. W, you can connect a  
rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer with-  
out using an auxiliary amp. Initially, the navi-  
gation system is set for rear full-range speaker  
connection (Rear SP Full). When rear output is  
connected to full-range speakers (when  
Editing the PIN code  
You can edit the PIN code you like. Use this  
function when you need to change the PIN  
code from the default setting.  
1
Touch [PIN Edit] in Initial menu.  
137  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
09  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
or muted. Use [Volume] to control the navi-  
2
Touch number key to enter the new PIN  
gation voice guidance volume.  
code.  
Bluetooth Device (BD) address  
PIN code  
Switching 5.1CH setting  
When the navigation system is combined with  
the multi-channel processor system (e.g. DEQ-  
P8000 and AXM-P8000) (sold separately), you  
can use the multi-channel sound.  
Enter the following setting when combining  
the multi-channel processor system.  
Version of the Bluetooth module  
System (microprocessor) version  
CAUTION  
DO NOT enter this setting before you connect the  
multi-channel processor system. (If this setting is  
entered, the RCA (SUBWOOFER OUTPUTor  
NON-FADING OUTPUT) will output maximum vo-  
lume for the multi-channel processor system.)  
Pioneer is not responsible for any damage to the  
speaker equipment caused by ignoring this warn-  
ing.  
3
Touch [Enter] to fix the new PIN code.  
p The default setting of the PIN code is 0000.  
Switching the sound muting/  
attenuation  
Sound from this system is muted, attenuated  
or mixed automatically in the following cases:  
!
When a call is made or received using a  
cellular phone connected to navigation sys-  
tem.  
p This setting is possible only when the opti-  
cal cable connection box (supplied with the  
Multi-channel processor) is connected to  
the navigation system.  
!
When the voice guidance is output.  
p The sound muting/attenuation function  
does not work when you use a cellular  
phone connected to the navigation system  
via the Bluetooth adapter, which is sold se-  
parately.  
%
Touch [5.1CH] in Initial menu.  
If you touch [5.1CH], it will be turned [On]. If  
you touch [5.1CH] again to turn [Off].  
p When 5.1CH setting is [On], the sound  
muting/attenuation setting is not available.  
Other Functions  
Selecting the video for Rear  
display”  
You can choose either to show the same  
image as the front screen or to show the se-  
lected source on the Rear display.  
%
Touch [Mute Input/Guide] in Initial  
menu.  
Each touch of [Mute Input/Guide] changes  
the settings as follows:  
!
!
!
Mute Muting  
ATT Attenuation  
Normal Volume does not change  
p Operation returns to normal when the  
phone connection (the mute signal on the  
yellow/black lead) is ended or when the na-  
vigation guidance is ended.  
p Even when you receive a phone call, naviga-  
tion voice guidance cannot be attenuated  
138  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
09  
1
Press AV button to switch AV operation  
Setup adjustments  
screen.  
2
Press MENU button and then touch  
[REAR SCREEN].  
Each touch of [REAR SCREEN] changes the  
settings as follows:  
!
Mirror The video on the front screen of  
the navigation unit is output to the Rear  
display”  
1
!
!
!
DVD The video and sound of the DVDs  
are output to the Rear display”  
AV1 The video and sound of AV-1 are  
output to the Rear display”  
AV2 The video and sound of AV-2 are  
output to the Rear display”  
1 System menu display  
= Refer to step 3 in How to Display each  
Setting the video input  
p When [Mirror] is selected, the following re-  
strictions are applied to Rear display.  
When selecting [Rear View] in the map  
display, nothing is displayed.  
You can switch the setting according to the  
connected component.  
p Select [Video] to watch video of a con-  
nected component as AV-1 or AV-2  
source.  
All sounds cannot be output for Rear  
display.  
%
Touch [AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input] in  
The map screen navigation images out-  
put to the Rear displaydiffer from  
standard NTSC format images. There-  
fore, their quality will be inferior to the  
images that appear on the front screen.  
p When [DVD] is selected, the following re-  
strictions are applied to Rear display.  
When a CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc is  
set in the built-in DVD drive, nothing is  
output.  
System menu.  
Each touch of [AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input]  
changes the settings as follows:  
AV1 Input:  
!
!
!
Off No video component is connected  
Video External video component  
EXT Pioneer external unit connected  
with RCA video cable  
M-DVD DVD player or Multi-DVD player  
connected with IP-BUS cable  
!
p When [AV1] or [AV2] is selected, the follow-  
ing restrictions are applied to Rear dis-  
play.  
p When a DVD player or Multi-DVD player is  
connected with IP-BUS cable and RCA  
video cable, select [M-DVD]. When the AV  
source is [M-DVD], the Video imageof  
the DVD player or Multi-DVD player can be  
displayed.  
The Video imageand sound are output  
only when AV-1/AV-2 has both video  
and sound.  
The Video imageand sound are output  
only when the appropriate setting on  
[AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input].  
AV2 Input:  
!
!
Off No video component is connected  
Video External video component  
p When a Pioneer external unit is connected  
with an IP-BUS cable, select [EXT]. When  
the AV source is [EXT], the Video imageof  
the Pioneer external unit can be displayed.  
139  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
09  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
p Use AV2 Input when connecting CD-RM10  
(sold separately) through the external video  
component.  
2
Touch [Camera] to turn rear view cam-  
era setting on.  
Touching [Camera] switches between [On]  
and [Off].  
p Unless this setting is [On], you cannot  
Setting for rear view camera  
switch to Rear View mode.  
The following two functions are available. The  
rear view camera feature requires a separately  
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For de-  
tails, consult your dealer.)  
3
Touch [Polarity] to select an appropriate  
setting for polarity.  
Each time you touch [Polarity] switches be-  
tween the following polarity:  
Camera for backing up  
!
Battery When the polarity of the con-  
nected lead is positive while the shift lever  
is in the REVERSE (R) position  
GND When the polarity of the connected  
lead is negative while the shift lever is in  
the REVERSE (R) position  
The navigation system features a function that  
automatically switches to the full-screen rear  
camera image installed on your vehicle. When  
the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) position,  
the screen automatically switches to full-  
screen rear view camera.  
!
Camera for Rear view mode  
Switching the auto antenna  
setting  
If the blue lead of the navigation system is  
connected to the auto antenna of the vehicle,  
select either of the following settings:  
[Rear View] can be displayed at all times (e.g.  
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a  
split screen where map information is partially  
displayed. Please be aware that in this setting,  
camera image is not resized to fit, and that a  
portion of what is seen by the camera is not  
viewable.  
!
Radio Extends the antenna only for the  
Radio source. The antenna is stored when  
the source is switched to another source.  
Power Extends the antenna when the  
ignition switch is turned on. The antenna is  
stored when the ignition switch is turned  
off.  
!
CAUTION  
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which  
outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise screen  
image may appear reversed.  
%
Touch [Antenna Control] in System  
menu.  
!
Immediately confirm whether the display  
changes to a rear view camera image when  
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)  
from another position.  
When the whole screen changes to a rear  
view camera image during normal driving,  
switch to another setting.  
Touching [Antenna Control] switches be-  
tween [Radio] and [Power].  
p Regardless of whether [Radio] or [Power]  
is selected, turning off the ignition switch  
will cause the antenna to automatically re-  
tract.  
!
p Initially, this function is set to [Off].  
Setting the illumination color  
1
Touch [Camera] in System menu.  
The illumination color can be selected Blue or  
Red.  
1
Touch [Illumi Color] in System menu.  
140  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
09  
a cinema-sized picture (wide screen pic-  
ture) where captions lie outside the frame.  
Zoom (zoom)  
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same pro-  
portion both vertically and horizontally;  
ideal for a cinema-sized picture (wide  
screen picture).  
2
Touch desired color.  
!
Setting the screen color  
You can select one of five colors as the screen  
color.  
1
2
Touch [Screen Color] in System menu.  
!
Normal (normal)  
A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you  
no sense of disparity since its proportions  
are the same as that of the normal picture.  
Touch desired color.  
White/Blue/Yellow/Red/Green  
!
p Different settings can be memorized for  
each video source.  
Changing the Wide Screen  
Mode  
p When video is viewed in a wide screen  
mode that does not match its original as-  
pect ratio, it may appear differently.  
p Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may  
constitute an infringement on the authors  
rights protected by the Copyright Law.  
p Video will appear grainy when viewed in  
Cinema or Zoom mode.  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these  
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-  
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in  
a safe place and apply the parking brake (refer to  
p The navigation map and the rear view cam-  
era picture is always Full.  
%
Touch [Wide Mode] in System menu to  
select the desired setting.  
Touch [Wide Mode] repeatedly to switch be-  
tween the following settings:  
Full (full) Just (just) Cinema (cinema) —  
Zoom (zoom) Normal (normal)  
!
Full (full)  
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal  
direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3  
TV picture (normal picture) without any  
omissions.  
!
Just (just)  
The picture is enlarged slightly at the center  
and the amount of enlargement increases  
horizontally toward the ends of the picture,  
enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without  
sensing any disparity even on a wide  
screen.  
!
Cinema (cinema)  
A picture is enlarged by the same propor-  
tion as Just in the horizontal direction and  
by an intermediate proportion between Full  
and Zoom in the vertical direction; ideal for  
141  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
09  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
p If you select [Source], sources without  
Operating the Picture  
Adjustment  
video and sources with video are saved se-  
parately in the memory.  
p The picture adjustment may not be able to  
be used with some rear view cameras.  
p The same setting is selected for the normal  
background picture and the navigation  
map display.  
p Because of the LCD screen characteristics,  
you may not be able to adjust the screen at  
low temperatures.  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these  
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-  
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in  
a safe place and apply the parking brake (refer to  
1
2
Touch [V.Adjust] in System menu.  
3
Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the selected  
item.  
Select the desired item you want to ad-  
just.  
Each time you touch [+] or [-] increases or de-  
creases the level of selected item. +24 to -24  
is displayed as the level is increased or de-  
creased.  
!
Camera Switch to the picture adjust-  
ment display for the rear view camera  
Source Switch to the picture adjustment  
display for the AV source screen  
Map Switch to the picture adjustment  
display for the map screen  
!
!
p Adjust Dimmer in the range of +1 to +48.  
4
Touch [ESC] to return to the previous  
p When the display is already on the screen,  
screen.  
a message to that effect appears.  
Switching the backlight On/Off  
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,  
you can turn off the screen display without  
turning off the voice guidance.  
%
Touch [Screen Off] in System menu.  
The backlight turns off, and the screen turns  
off.  
Brightness Adjust the black intensity  
Contrast Adjust the contrast  
Color Adjust the color saturation  
Hue Adjust the tone of color (red is empha-  
sized or green is emphasized)  
p To turn on the backlight, touch the screen  
again or press MAP button.  
Dimmer Adjust the brightness of display  
p The adjustments of Brightness, Contrast  
and Dimmer are stored separately when  
your vehicles headlights are off (daytime)  
and when your vehicles headlights are on  
(nighttime). These are switched automati-  
cally depending on the vehicles headlights  
are on or off.  
p You cannot adjust Color and Hue for the  
source without video and navigation map  
display.  
142  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing the AV Source Setting  
Language Code Chart for DVD  
09  
Language (code), input code  
Japanese (ja), 1001  
English (en), 0514  
French (fr), 0618  
Spanish (es), 0519  
German (de), 0405  
Italian (it), 0920  
Language (code), input code  
Guarani (gn), 0714  
Gujarati (gu), 0721  
Hausa (ha), 0801  
Language (code), input code  
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619  
Quechua (qu), 1721  
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813  
Kirundi (rn), 1814  
Rumanian (ro), 1815  
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823  
Sanskrit (sa), 1901  
Sindhi (sd), 1904  
Hindi (hi), 0809  
Croatian (hr), 0818  
Hungarian (hu), 0821  
Armenian (hy), 0825  
Interlingua (ia), 0901  
Interlingue (ie), 0905  
Inupiak (ik), 0911  
Indonesian (in), 0914  
Icelandic (is), 0919  
Hebrew (iw), 0923  
Yiddish (ji), 1009  
Javanese (jw), 1023  
Georgian (ka), 1101  
Kazakh (kk), 1111  
Greenlandic (kl), 1112  
Cambodian (km), 1113  
Kannada (kn), 1114  
Kashmiri (ks), 1119  
Kurdish (ku), 1121  
Kirghiz (ky), 1125  
Chinese (zh), 2608  
Dutch (nl), 1412  
Portuguese (pt), 1620  
Swedish (sv), 1922  
Russian (ru), 1821  
Korean (ko), 1115  
Greek (el), 0512  
Sango (sg), 1907  
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908  
Shinghalese (si), 1909  
Slovak (sk), 1911  
Slovenian (sl), 1912  
Samoan (sm), 1913  
Shona (sn), 1914  
Somali (so), 1915  
Albanian (sq), 1917  
Serbian (sr), 1918  
Siswati (ss), 1919  
Sesotho (st), 1920  
Sundanese (su), 1921  
Swahili (sw), 1923  
Tamil (ta), 2001  
Afar (aa), 0101  
Abkhazian (ab), 0102  
Afrikaans (af), 0106  
Amharic (am), 0113  
Arabic (ar), 0118  
Assamese (as), 0119  
Aymara (ay), 0125  
Azerbaijani (az), 0126  
Bashkir (ba), 0201  
Belorussian (be), 0205  
Bulgarian (bg), 0207  
Bihari (bh), 0208  
Latin (la), 1201  
Lingala (ln), 1214  
Telugu (te), 2005  
Tajik (tg), 2007  
Bislama (bi), 0209  
Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214  
Tibetan (bo), 0215  
Breton (br), 0218  
Catalan (ca), 0301  
Corsican (co), 0315  
Czach (cs), 0319  
Laotian (lo), 1215  
Thai (th), 2008  
Lithusnian (lt), 1220  
Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222  
Malagasy (mg), 1307  
Maori (mi), 1309  
Macedonian (mk), 1311  
Malayalam (ml), 1312  
Mongolian (mn), 1314  
Moldavian (mo), 1315  
Marathi (mr), 1318  
Malay (ms), 1319  
Tigrinya (ti), 2009  
Turkmen (tk), 2011  
Tagalog (tl), 2012  
Setswana (tn), 2014  
Tongan (to), 2015  
Turkish (tr), 2018  
Tsonga (ts), 2019  
Tatar (tt), 2020  
Twi (tw), 2023  
Ukrainian (uk), 2111  
Urdu (ur), 2118  
Welsh (cy), 0325  
Danish (da), 0401  
Bhutani (dz), 0426  
Esperanto (eo), 0515  
Estonian (et), 0520  
Basque (eu), 0521  
Persian (fa), 0601  
Finnish (fi), 0609  
Fiji (fj), 0610  
Faroese (fo), 0615  
Frisian (fy), 0625  
Maltese (mt), 1320  
Burmese (my), 1325  
Nauru (na), 1401  
Uzbek (uz), 2126  
Vietnamese (vi), 2209  
Volapük (vo), 2215  
Wolof (wo), 2315  
Xhosa (xh), 2408  
Yoruba (yo), 2515  
Zulu (zu), 2621  
Nepali (ne), 1405  
Norwegian (no), 1415  
Occitan (oc), 1503  
Oromo (om), 1513  
Oriya (or), 1518  
Irish (ga), 0701  
Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704  
Galician (gl), 0712  
Panjabi (pa), 1601  
Polish (pl), 1612  
143  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting  
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common  
problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehen-  
sive, it should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be  
found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.  
Problems in the navigation screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (See)  
Power doesnt turn on. The unit Leads and connectors are incor-  
Confirm once more that all connections are  
correct.  
doesnt operate.  
rectly connected.  
The fuse is blown.  
Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then  
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-  
rect fuse with the same rate.  
Noise and other factors are causing Press RESET button. (Refer to Page 28 in this  
the built-in microprocessor to oper- manual.)  
ate incorrectly.  
The power turns on, but the unit The 30-pin cable has been discon-  
Press RESET button while the power is on.  
does not operate.  
nected and then reconnected.  
When the ignition switch is  
turned ON (or turned to ACC),  
the motor sounds.  
The navigation system confirms  
whether a disc is loaded or not.  
This is a normal operation.  
You cannot position your vehicle The quality of signals from the GPS Check the GPS signal reception and the posi-  
on the map or the positioning  
error is large.  
satellites is poor, causing reduced  
tion of the GPS antenna if necessary, or con-  
positioning accuracy. Such a loss of tinue driving until reception improves. Keep  
signal quality may happen for the  
following reasons:  
the antenna clear.  
The GPS antenna is in an unsuita-  
ble location.  
Obstacles are blocking signals  
from the satellites.  
The position of satellites relative to  
your vehicle is bad.  
Signals from the GPS satellites  
have been modified to reduce accu-  
racy. (GPS satellites are operated by  
the US Department of Defense, and  
the US government reserves the  
right to distort positioning data for  
military reasons. This may lead to  
greater positioning errors.)  
If a vehicle phone or cellular  
phone is used near the GPS anten-  
na, GPS reception may be lost tem-  
porarily.  
144  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Something covers the GPS antenna. Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray  
paint or vehicle wax, because this may block  
You cannot position your vehicle  
on the map or the positioning  
error is large.  
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup  
can also degrade the signals.  
Signals from the vehicles speed  
Check that the cables are properly connected.  
pulse are not being picked up prop- If necessary, consult the dealer that installed  
erly.  
the system.  
The navigation system may not be  
mounted securely in your vehicle.  
Check that the navigation system is securely  
mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer  
that installed the system.  
Your vehicle is operating in Simple Connect the speed signal input (pink lead  
hybrid mode.  
wire) of the power cable correctly, and reset  
the 3D Hybrid Sensor memory ([Learning  
Status]).  
The navigation system is installed  
with an extreme angle exceeding  
the limitation of the installation  
angle.  
Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-  
tion system must be installed within the al-  
lowed installation angle. For details, refer to  
Installation Manual.)  
Indication of the position of your ve- Check whether or not the reverse gear signal  
hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or input lead (violet) is connected properly. (The  
reversing.  
navigation system works properly without the  
lead connected, but positioning accuracy will  
be adversely affected.)  
The map continually reorients it- The traveling direction is set to  
Touch  
on the screen and change the map  
self.  
Heading up.  
display.  
Tracking marks are not dis-  
played.  
[Tracking Display] is turned off.  
Check [Tracking Display] settings and make  
sure [Always] or [This Trip] is selected.  
The daylight display is used  
[Daytime] is set to [Day/Night Dis- Check [Day/Night Display] setting and make  
even when the vehicle lights are play].  
sure [Nighttime] is selected. (Page 83)  
on.  
The orange/white lead is not con-  
nected.  
Check the connection.  
The system will not switch on or Installation or connection has been Check with your dealer.  
will not operate.  
carried out incorrectly.  
The display is very dim.  
The vehicles light is turned ON, and Read about [Day/Night Display] setting and,  
[Nighttime] is selected on [Day/  
if desired, select [Daytime]. (Page 83)  
Night Display].  
The vehicle cabin temperature is ex- A Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is used, and  
tremely low.  
such displays tend to darken when cold. Wait  
for the vehicle to warm up.  
Picture quality adjustment of the  
display is not correct.  
Refer to Page 142to adjust the picture qual-  
ity.  
No sounds are heard.  
The volume level will not rise.  
The volume level is low.  
Adjust the volume level.  
Turn the attenuator or mute off.  
Check the connection.  
The attenuator or mute is on.  
The speaker lead is disconnected.  
Adjusting the volume of naviga- You cannot adjust them with VO-  
tion guidance and beeps is not LUME knob.  
possible.  
Turn the volume up or down according to [Vo-  
lume] in [Settings] menu. (Page 80)  
145  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
The sound for the entry of [Address Set the sound setting of that entry to [No  
Book] is set.  
Sound]. (Page 64)  
A strange sound is heard when  
the vehicle comes close to a cer-  
tain place (e.g. Dog barking).  
Slope is not displayed on Vehi- The speed pulse lead is not con-  
Connect the speed pulse lead.  
cle Dynamics screen.  
nected.  
Inclinationdoes not move on  
3D Calibration screen.  
The person on the other end of The voice from the person on the  
Use the following methods to reduce the  
the phone call cannot hear the other end of the phone call is output echo:  
conversation due to an echo.  
from the speakers and then picked Lower the volume on the receiver  
up by the microphone again, creat- Have both speakers pause slightly before  
ing an echo.  
speaking  
Playback is not possible.  
The disc is dirty.  
Clean disc.  
The loaded disc is a type this unit  
cannot play.  
Check what type the disc is.  
A non-compatible video system disc Change to a disc compatible to your video  
is loaded.  
system.  
Theres no picture.  
The parking brake cord is not con-  
nected.  
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply  
the parking brake.  
The parking brake is not applied.  
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply  
the parking brake.  
The audio and video skip.  
This unit is not firmly secured.  
Secure this unit firmly.  
Rear display picture disappears. The source disc being listened to in Before ejecting the disc, switch the source.  
the navigation system has been  
ejected.  
This problem may occur when certain con-  
nection methods are used.  
There was a problem with the rear  
display or a faulty wiring connec-  
tion.  
Check the rear display and its connection.  
Switch the source with a video.  
The source without a video is se-  
lected.  
Problems in the AV screen (during DVD-Video playback)  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (See)  
CD or DVD playback is not pos- The disc is inserted upside down.  
Insert the disc with the label upward.  
Clean disc.  
sible.  
The disc is dirty.  
The disc is cracked or otherwise da- Insert a normal, round disc.  
maged.  
The files on the CD (DVD)are an  
irregular file format.  
Check the file format.  
Replace disc.  
The CD (DVD)format cannot be  
played back.  
The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type the disc is. (Also see Page  
cannot play.  
168for more cautions about handling each  
type of media.)  
146  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
The parking brake lead is not con-  
nected or applied.  
Connect a parking brake lead correctly, and  
apply the parking brake.  
No picture.  
Parking brake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply  
the parking brake. (Page 20)  
[AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input] setting Please read the following page and set the  
is incorrect.  
setting correctly. (Page 139)  
The audio skips.  
The navigation system is not firmly Secure the navigation system firmly.  
secured.  
Rear displaypicture disap-  
pears.  
There was a problem with the Rear Check the Rear displayand its connection.  
displayor a faulty wiring connec-  
tion, for example.  
[DVD/DivX Setup] is carried out.  
You can not display the video image to Rear  
displayduring [DVD/DivX Setup] menu.  
Nothing is displayed and the  
touch panel keys cannot be  
used.  
The setting for the rear view camera Connect a rear view camera correctly.  
is incorrect.  
The shift lever was placed in [R]  
Press MAP button to return to the map  
when the rear view camera was not screen first and display AV MENU and then  
connected.  
switch [Camera] to [Off] in System menu.  
(For details concerning operations, refer to  
The back light of the LCD panel is  
turned off.  
Turn on the back light. (Page 142)  
Touch panel key is not respond Touch panel keys deviate from the  
or a different key is responding. actual positions that respond to  
your touch for some reason.  
Perform the touch panel calibration. (Page  
NO SIGNALis displayed at the While waiting for a response from  
Wait for a while and try the operation again.  
right corner on the map.  
the XM tuner.  
You are in an area that cannot re-  
ceive XM tuner reception.  
Move into an area that can receive XM tuner  
reception.  
Your current location provides very Change your location.  
poor reception.  
UPDATINGis displayed at the Service subscription is either XM  
Since the GEX-P10XMT is capable of receiving  
both XM audio and XM NavTraffic service, if  
you are subscribed to only one or the other,  
the system checks to see if you have added  
another service to your account since you  
last powered on the navigation system. When  
you subscribe to both services, this message  
will stop appearing when you turn the ignition  
ON (ACC ON).  
right corner on the map.  
audio only or XM NavTraffic stand  
alone.  
No sounds are heard.  
Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.  
The volume level will not rise.  
The system is performing still, slow There is no sound during still, slow motion, or  
motion, or frame-by-frame playback frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video.  
with DVD-Video.  
The system is paused or performing, For an MP3/WMA/AAC, there is no sound on  
fast rewind or forward during the  
MP3/WMA/AAC disc playback.  
fast rewind or forward.  
The icon 9 is displayed, and op- The operation is not compatible  
eration is not possible. with the DVDs configuration.  
This operation is not possible. (For example,  
the DVD playing does not feature that angle,  
audio system, subtitle language, etc.)  
147  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Reading of data has become impos- After touching g once, start playback once  
sible during DVD playback.  
more.  
The picture stops (pauses) and  
the unit cannot be operated.  
The picture is stretched, the as- The aspect setting is incorrect for  
pect is incorrect. the display.  
Select the appropriate setting for that image.  
A parental lock message is dis- Parental lock is on.  
played and DVD playback is not  
possible.  
Turn parental lock off or change the level.  
Parental lock for DVD playback The code number is incorrect.  
cannot be canceled.  
Input the correct code number. (Page 135)  
Playback is not with the audio  
The DVD playing does not feature  
Switching to a selected language is not possi-  
ble if the language selected in [DVD/DivX  
Setup] is not recorded on the disc.  
language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language  
settings selected in [DVD/DivX selected in [DVD/DivX Setup].  
Setup].  
Switching the viewing angle is  
not possible.  
The DVD playing does not feature  
scenes shot from multiple angles.  
You cannot switch between multiple angles if  
the DVD does not feature scenes recorded  
from multiple angles.  
You are trying to switch to multiple Switch between multiple angles when watch-  
angle viewing of a scene that is not ing scenes recorded from multiple angles.  
recorded from multiple angles.  
The picture is extremely unclear/ The disc features a signal to prohibit Since the navigation system is compatible  
distorted and dark during play- copying. (Some discs may have  
back. this.)  
with the copy guard analog copy protect sys-  
tem, when playing a disc that has a signal  
prohibiting copying, the picture may suffer  
from horizontal stripes or other imperfections  
when viewed on some displays. This does not  
mean this unit is malfunctioning.  
Problems in the AV screen (during iPod playback)  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (See)  
Cannot be operated.  
The iPod is frozen.  
! Reconnect the iPod with the interface cable  
for iPod (sold separately).  
! Update the iPod version.  
The error has occurred.  
! Reconnect the iPod with the interface cable  
for iPod (sold separately).  
! Set the ACC to Off and set it to On again.  
! Update the iPod version.  
When the screen is frozen...  
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and cut off  
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc  
off. Then start the engine again, and turn the  
power to the navigation system back on. If this  
does not solve the problem, press RESET but-  
ton on the navigation system.  
148  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Messages and how to react to them  
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system.  
p
There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a case, follow the in-  
structions given on the display.  
Message  
When  
What to do (See)  
Please insert the appropriate If you try to use a disc which is in-  
Insert a suitable disc.  
disc.  
compatible with this system.  
If you insert a disc upside down.  
If the disc is dirty.  
ATTENTION This is not the ap-  
propriate disc. Please insert  
the appropriate disc.  
Insert the disc with the label upward.  
Clean the disc.  
If the disc is cracked or otherwise  
damaged.  
Insert a normal, round disc.  
Irregular speed pulse signal is If the Navigation system does not re- Consult your Pioneer dealer.  
detected. Please power off  
the system and check the in-  
stallation. After you have  
checked, please re-boot the  
system and press "OK".  
ceive the vehicle speed pulse.  
Speed pulse wire is not con-  
nected. System will start to  
learn without speed pulse.  
Please keep in mind that accu-  
racy is not fully ensured with-  
out speed pulse.  
The speed signal input (pink lead  
wire) of the power cable is not con- speed signal input (pink lead wire) of the  
nected.  
To operate with 3D hybrid mode, connect the  
power cable correctly.  
Although it can be operated with Simple hy-  
brid mode without connecting the speed sig-  
nal input, the precision of the positioning will  
be less accurate.  
Vibration is detected. Please  
power off the system and  
check the installation. After  
you have checked, please re-  
boot the system and press  
"OK ".  
The navigation unit is installed in a Re-install the navigation unit in a place where  
place where it may be affected by a the unit will not be affected by vibration.  
large vibration.  
Direction of G sensor is not  
Direction of G sensor is set incor-  
See the Installation Manualand set the di-  
correct. Please power off the rectly.  
system and check the installa-  
tion. After you have checked,  
please re-boot the system and  
press "OK".  
rection of the navigation unit correctly.  
Gyro Sensor is not working  
properly. Please consult your the Gyrosensor.  
dealer or Pioneer service cen-  
ter.  
Abnormal output is detected from  
Note down the error code shown on the  
screen. Turn off the power, and then contact  
your nearest Pioneer service facility.  
This function is not available The screen cannot be displayed with If the sensor learning status reaches the Sen-  
now. Vehicle Dynamics Display. Because sor Initializing status, the system is ready to  
the sensor has not been taught so  
the sensor information cannot be  
acquired.  
be used.  
149  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
If the mounting angle of the naviga- The system initializes the sensor in order to  
tion unit has been changed.  
operate it with the maximum performance  
and automatically starts re-learning.  
System detected that the ver-  
tical angle of the installation  
has been changed. Learning  
status for Gyro Sensor has  
been initialized.  
System detected that the ver- The navigation system is installed  
tical angle of the installation with an extreme angle exceeding  
exceeds the permission level. the limitation of the installation  
Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-  
tion system must be installed within the al-  
lowed installation angle. For details refer to  
Installation Manual.)  
Please install the navigation  
unit correctly.  
angle.  
No data available at this time. If no data is available that can be  
Wait for a while and try the operation again.  
Wait for a while and try the operation again.  
used with the XM tuner.  
No XM signal. Please wait.  
While waiting for a response from  
the XM tuner.  
You are in an area that cannot re-  
ceive XM tuner reception.  
Move into an area that can receive XM tuner  
reception.  
Your current location provides very Change your location.  
poor reception.  
XM updating. Please wait.  
Service subscription is either XM  
audio only or XM NavTraffic stand  
alone.  
Since the GEX-P10XMT is capable of receiving  
both XM audio and XM NavTraffic service, if  
you are subscribed to only one or the other,  
the system checks to see if you have added  
another service to your account since you  
last powered on the navigation system. When  
you subscribe to both services, this message  
will stop appearing when you turn the ignition  
ON (ACC ON).  
Radio is being updated with the lat- Wait until the encryption code is fully up-  
est encryption code.  
dated.  
Updating  
The selected channel is not in-  
cluded in your subscription.  
Select another channel.  
Radio is being updated with the lat- Wait until the encryption code is fully up-  
est encryption code.  
dated.  
Route calculation was not  
possible.  
Route calculation has failed be-  
cause of a malfunction of map data, Clean the disc.  
Change the destination.  
software, hardware or disc.  
Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-  
sage persists.  
Route calculation was not  
possible because the destina-  
tion is too far.  
The destination is too far.  
Set a destination closer to the starting  
point.  
Set one or more way points.  
Route calculation was not  
The destination or way point(s) are Set a destination or way point(s) farther from  
possible because the destina- too close.  
the starting point.  
tion is too near.  
Route calculation was not  
The destination or way point(s) are Set a destination and way point(s) outside  
possible due to traffic regula- in a Control Traffic Zone (CTR) and the CTR if you know where the restricted area  
tions.  
the route calculation is hampered. is.  
Your vehicle is currently in a Con- Try a destination or way point(s) away from  
trol Traffic Zone (CTR) and the route the currently set points to some extent.  
calculation is hampered.  
Drive your vehicle to an unrestricted area  
and reset the destination and way point(s).  
150  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
The destination, way point(s) or  
Set a destination and way point(s) on roads.  
starting point are in an area where Reset the destination after you drive the ve-  
no road exists (e.g. a mountain) and hicle to any road.  
the route calculation is impossible.  
Route calculation was not  
possible because no guidance  
can be provided around the  
destination or the starting  
point.  
There is no route to the desti- The destination or way point(s) are Change the destination.  
nation.  
on an isolated island, etc. without a  
ferry and the route calculation is im-  
possible.  
The route could not avoid the If route setting cannot avoid speci- If the current route is not desired, set a desti-  
specified area.  
fied Designate Areas to Avoid.  
nation or way point(s) that do not pass  
through Designate Areas to Avoid.  
The route could not avoid the If the route to the destination or way If the current route is not desired, set a desti-  
specified area. Toll road has  
not been avoided.  
point(s) cannot be established by  
bypassing toll roads (including toll through toll roads (including toll areas) and  
nation or way point(s) that do not pass  
areas) and Designate Areas to  
Designate Areas to Avoid.  
Avoid.  
Ferry has not been avoided.  
In case a ferry route was included in If the current route is not desired, set a desti-  
the route to the destination or way nation or way point(s) that do not pass  
point(s) even though [Avoid Ferry] through a ferry route.  
was set to [On].  
Toll road has not been  
avoided.  
If the route to the destination or way If the current route is not desired, set a desti-  
point(s) cannot be established by  
nation or way point(s) that do not pass  
bypassing toll roads (including toll through toll roads (including toll areas).  
areas).  
The address does not exist.  
Do you want to continue?  
If the house number is entered with- Re-enter the existing house number by follow-  
out specifying city or street and that ing the instructions shown on the screen.  
house number does not exist on the Or, proceed to the next step without entering  
data.  
the house number and specify the city or  
street first.  
There is no applicable data for If the history data of the city could  
Once the search is performed to specify the  
the selected city. Automati-  
cally returning to list.  
not be used (for example, if the his- city, the result is saved as a history. The data  
tory data of the city that was used in of the specified city, however, may not be hit  
POI Search cannot be found in Ad- by the different search criteria. In this case,  
dress Search).  
try another search method or change the des-  
tination.  
There is no Freeway in this  
area.  
If no freeway was found in the se-  
lected zone.  
Set the destination or way points using an-  
other search method or change the location  
of the destination or way point(s).  
This area does not contain  
Vicinity Search cannot be per-  
Replace the DVD Map Disc and perform Vici-  
any POI's of the selected type. formed because the searched loca- nity Search again.  
tion is in areas not stored on the  
DVD Map Disc.  
Facilities of the selected category do Use another search method or move to an-  
not exist in the surrounding areas. other location and perform Vicinity Search  
again.  
Only City Center can be  
searched.  
If POI Search was performed on  
areas not stored on the DVD Map  
Disc.  
Only the City Center can be searched. If you  
want to search other categories in areas not  
stored on the disc, replace the DVD Map Disc  
and perform the POI Search again. Set the  
areas stored on the DVD Map Disc to destina-  
tion or way points.  
151  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
When areas not stored on the DVD Set the destination or way point(s) in the  
Map Disc are included in the  
search.  
countries stored on the DVD Map Disc, or re-  
place the DVD Map Disc and perform the  
search again.  
This zone is not available on  
the disc. Please insert an ap-  
propriate disc.  
Failed to make the route pro- Failed to generate the route profile  
Insert the DVD Map Disc and retry.  
file.  
because the set route passes  
through areas not stored on the  
DVD Map Disc.  
The maximum number of re- If there are already 300 items when Delete unnecessary data and try to register  
gistrations has been com-  
pleted. Please clear existing  
registered items and re-regis-  
ter current item.  
you attempt to register an item in  
Address Book.  
again.  
Memory is full.  
When a total of 300 registered  
Delete unnecessary data on the system and  
points are in the disc and Address try to register again or reduce currently se-  
Book, you attempt moving an item lected items.  
to Address Book from disc.  
There is no /PICTURES/ folder. Cannot load the image because PIC- Use the appropriate data after reading Page  
Please create /PICTURES/ TURES folder is not found in the in- 75.  
folder and store JPEG files in serted disc.  
that Folder.  
There is no Disc. Please insert The disc in which the background  
Insert the disc that contains the background  
a Disc with JPEG files stored in picture is stored is not correctly in- pictures.  
the /PICTURES/ folder.  
serted.  
Data read error. Change is  
cancelled.  
Failed to read the data because the Try re-reading the data by inserting a clean  
disc is damaged or dirty. Or, the  
pick-up lens of the DVD drive is  
dirty.  
disc.  
Clean the pick-up lens with a commercially  
available cleaning kit for DVD, then try to  
reading again.  
JPEG file is corrupt. Change is The data is damaged or an attempt Use the appropriate data after reading Page  
cancelled.  
was made to set a JPEG image that 75.  
does not conform to specifications  
as the background picture.  
Data Read error. Back to Origi- Failed to read the data because the Try re-reading the data by inserting a clean  
nal Background. Please do not disc is damaged or dirty. Or, the disc.  
turn power off.  
pickup lens of the DVD drive is dirty. Clean the pick-up lens with a commercially  
available cleaning kit for DVD, then try to  
reading again.  
There are no files available in PICTURES folder exists on the disc Use the appropriate data after reading Page  
/PICTURES/ folder.  
but no data in JPEG format exists.  
Please insert the appropriate In the memory navi mode, if the  
Insert the DVD Map Disc.  
disc. Route calculation was  
not possible.  
Auto-reroute does not function for  
some reason.  
No route data can be stored. The area to be set for [Map in Mem- Change the memory area to be set to areas  
You should insert the disc that ory] is areas not stored on the DVD stored on the DVD Map Disc.  
contains the map data of the Map Disc.  
Insert the DVD Map Disc containing that  
current position.  
area.  
Scaling down.  
Scaling up.  
In the memory navi mode, if the  
DVD Map Disc is inserted without  
The scale automatically returns to the scale  
that was set in the DVD navi mode before  
changing the scale (only when the being changed to the memory navi mode.  
point is stored on the DVD Map  
Disc).  
152  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
When the scale that had been pre- If the desired scale cannot be selected, insert  
viously displayed cannot be dis-  
played for the following reasons:  
The disc was ejected and the sys-  
tem was changed to the memory  
navi mode.  
the DVD Map Disc that contains that area  
and then change the scale.  
No map data available on  
this scale. Scaling up.  
No map data available on  
this scale. Scaling down.  
In the memory navi mode, the  
map was scrolled to outside the  
memory area. Or, the vehicle moved  
outside of the memory area.  
The map was scrolled to areas not  
stored on the DVD Map Disc. Or, the  
vehicle moved to unrecorded areas.  
The map was scrolled from unrec-  
orded areas to the memory area. Or,  
the vehicle moved from unrecorded  
areas to the memory area.  
Failure in the memory recov- Failed to complete the recovery of  
Clean the disc.  
ery process. Memory naviga- the memory area because the disc Clean the DVD drive.  
tion is presently not possible. could not be read for some reason, Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-  
resulting in deletion of the memory. sage persists.  
The map data could not be  
stored. Previous setting will  
be kept.  
Recovery was performed for the  
memory area after failing to read  
the disc data for some reason (the  
memory area that was previously  
set will be recovered).  
Clean the disc.  
Clean the DVD drive.  
Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-  
sage persists.  
This function is not available The current position is areas not  
Zoom in again after the vehicle moves into an  
area stored on the DVD Map Disc.  
with the current map disc.  
stored on the DVD Map Discand  
an attempt was made to zoom in to Or, replace the DVD Map Disc and try to  
make the scale 0.5 mile or more. zoom in again.  
Failed to save to memory.  
Please re-enter setting.  
The settings could not be saved for Retry.  
some reason.  
Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-  
sage persists.  
CAUTION! System detected  
Parking brake lead is incorrectly  
Confirm once more that their connections are  
correct.  
improper connection of Park- connected.  
ing Brake lead. Please check  
your configuration for safety.  
Please see Operation Manual  
for more information regard-  
ing safe operation.  
Viewing of front seat video  
source while driving is strictly  
prohibited.  
Parking brake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in the safe place and apply  
the parking brake. (Page 20)  
153  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Error Messages  
When problems occur with AV source playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer  
to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error  
persists, contact your dealer or your nearest PIONEER Service Center.  
The messages in ( )will appear on the Rear display.  
Message  
Cause  
Action (See)  
Reading error  
Dirty  
Clean disc.  
(ERROR-02-XX)  
Scratched disc  
The disc is loaded upside down  
Electrical or mechanical  
Replace disc.  
Check that the disc is loaded correctly.  
Mechanism error  
Press RESET button. (Refer to Page 28 in this  
manual.)  
Region code error (DIFFERENT The disc does not have the same re- Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the  
REGION DISC)  
gion number as the navigation sys- correct region number.  
tem.  
NON-PLAYABLE DISC  
This type of disc cannot be played  
by the navigation system  
Replace the disc with one the navigation sys-  
tem can play.  
Thermal error (THERMAL PRO- The temperature of the navigation  
TECTION IN MOTION)  
Wait until the units temperature returns to  
system is outside of the normal op- within normal operating limits.  
erating range  
Error not defined (ERROR-FF- Undefined error  
Press RESET button. (Refer to Page 28 in this  
FF)  
manual.)  
Non-playable tracks are  
skipped. (FILE SKIPPED)  
Files that are protected by digital  
rights management.  
The protected files are skipped.  
Impossible to play all tracks.  
(PROCETED DISC,DRM Pro-  
tected)  
All the files on the inserted disc are Replace disc.  
secured by DRM.  
Flash writing error. Impossible The playback history for VOD con-  
Try saving again.  
to write on the flash. (CAN  
tents cannot be saved for some rea- If the message appears frequently, consult  
NOT SAVE DATA)  
son.  
your dealer.  
Authorization Error (AUTHOR- The device does not match the de-  
Check whether this device has been regis-  
IZATION ERROR)  
vice registered with the VOD provi- tered with the VOD provider.  
der. VOD contents cannot be played  
back.  
NON-PLAYABLE FILE  
VOD rental contents file error  
Try saving again.  
If the message appears frequently, consult  
your dealer.  
Played back a disc with incompati- Playback a disc with compatible format.  
ble format.  
ERROR-11  
ERROR-21  
Connected an iPod with no charge. Turn [iPod Charge] is [On] and reconnect  
the iPod.  
Connect a charged iPod.  
The iPod version is not compatible. Use an iPod with a compatible version.  
154  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
10 Reenter the password in step 7 to con-  
firm the setting.  
Anti-theft function  
You can set a password for the navigation sys-  
tem. If the back-up lead is cut or RESET button  
is pressed after the password is set, the navi-  
gation system prompts for the password next  
boot up.  
11 Touch [OK].  
The password is set.  
Enter the password  
If the incorrect password is entered, the navi-  
gation and AV functions cannot be performed.  
In password input screen, you must enter the  
current password. If you enter the incorrect  
password three times, the navigation system  
is locked.  
Setting the password  
Set both the password and a hint phrase at  
the same time. Set a password based on the  
hint phrase. The hint phrase will remind you of  
the password in case you forget it.  
1
Enter the password.  
2
Touch [OK].  
The password mode is canceled.  
1
With the map displayed, press MENU  
button.  
Delete the password  
2
3
4
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU.  
The current password can be deleted.  
Touch [System Options].  
1
With the map displayed, press MENU  
button.  
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and  
then touch and hold Area3.  
2
3
4
Touch [Settings] in NAVI MENU.  
Area1  
Area2  
Area3  
Touch [System Options].  
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and  
then touch and hold Area3.  
The password setting screen appears.  
5
6
7
8
Touch [Clear password].  
Enter the current password.  
Touch [OK].  
The password setting screen appears.  
5
6
Touch [Set password].  
Select a hint phrase.  
Touch [Yes].  
p Touching or switches to the next or pre-  
vious page in the list.  
The current password is deleted.  
7
8
Touch [OK].  
If the password is forgotten  
Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser-  
vice Station.  
Enter the password you want to set.  
p Five to sixteen characters can be entered  
for a password.  
9
Touch [OK].  
155  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
3
Touch [Yes/Oui].  
Installing the Program  
When you start the navigation system for the  
first time, you will see a confirmation message  
asking if you wish to select another language.  
English is the default language of the naviga-  
tion system. If desired, you can select another  
language as shown.  
p To keep English, touch [No/Non].  
p When you want to select another language,  
touch [Yes/Oui], and proceed to the next  
step.  
The program is installed to the navigation sys-  
tem using the application disc.  
This is not necessary if your dealer al-  
ready performed the installation.  
When installing the program, you carry out  
the following operations. When all the setup  
procedures are completed, you can use the  
navigation system.  
1 Insert the disc while the vehicle is parked.  
4
Select the language from the list.  
Touch the language you want to use.  
j
2 Select the language used for the navigation  
system.  
j
3 Set the time difference.  
CAUTION  
p The language selected here is reflected for  
the Navigation functions (e.g., Destination  
search, etc.) only.  
Installation of the program begins in the lan-  
guage that you chose.  
Once the installation of the program starts, do  
not stop the engine of your vehicle nor switch off  
the navigation system until the installation is  
completed and the following Map screen with  
current position appears.  
1
Park your vehicle in a safe place.  
Leave the engine on, and make sure that the  
parking brake is applied.  
2
Insert the Pioneer DVD Map Disc into  
the disc loading slot of the navigation sys-  
tem.  
When the upgraded program has been found,  
installation of the program starts immediately.  
p Do not insert anything other than a disc  
into the disc loading slot.  
When the installation is complete, the opening  
display appears.  
p If you cannot insert a disc completely or if  
an inserted disc is not recognized, check  
that the label side of the disc is up. Press  
EJECT button to eject the disc, and check  
the disc for damage before inserting the  
disc again.  
156  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
8
To complete the setting, touch [Back].  
Some time is needed until navigation is ready.  
5
Check the details of the caution mes-  
The map of your surroundings appears.  
This completes the setup of your navigation  
sage and touch [OK].  
system. Chapter 2 explains the basic operation  
of your navigation system.  
= For details, refer to Time on page 84.  
6
[-].  
To set the time difference, touch [+] or  
Adjusting the Response  
Positions of the Touch Panels  
(Touch Panel Calibration)  
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the  
screen deviate from the actual positions that  
respond to your touch, adjust the response po-  
sitions of the touch panel screen. There are  
two adjustment methods: 4-point adjustment,  
in which you touch four corners of the screen,  
and 16-point adjustment, in which you make  
fine-adjustments on the entire screen.  
p Make sure to use the supplied stylus for ad-  
justment and gently touch the screen. If  
you press the touch panel forcefully, the  
touch panel may be damaged. Do not use  
a sharp pointed tool such as a ballpoint  
pen or a mechanical pen. Otherwise the  
screen is damaged.  
Time difference  
The time difference between the time origin-  
ally set in the navigation system (Pacific Stan-  
dard Time) and the current location of your  
vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the time  
difference. Touching [+] or [-] changes the  
time difference display in one-hour incre-  
ments.  
The time difference can be set from +3 to -3  
hours.  
7
If necessary, set to summer time.  
Daylight Saving Time (DST) is off by default.  
Touch [Off] to change the time if you are in  
the daylight saving period. This turns the dis-  
play below summer time [On].  
Stylus (supplied with navigation  
system)  
1
Press VOLUME knob (or AV button) to  
switch to the AV operation screen.  
157  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
2
Press MENU button to change to AV  
Memory Navi Mode  
Source screen.  
While the DVD Map Disc is inserted, you can  
store the data on the DVD Map Disc into the  
memory of the navigation system. If the DVD  
Map Disc is removed from the navigation sys-  
tem after the data is stored, navigation is per-  
formed using the data in the memory  
(memory navi mode). In the memory navi  
mode, you can play a music CD or DVD-Video  
on the navigation system while navigation is  
taking place.  
3
Press and hold MENU button for two  
seconds or more.  
The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap-  
pears.  
4
Touch and hold the arrows that point  
to the corners of the LCD screen with the  
stylus.  
The red arrow indicates the order.  
The operation is automatically switched to the  
memory navi mode when the DVD Map Disc  
is removed from the navigation system.  
Navigation in the memory navi  
mode  
During the memory navi mode, navigation is  
performed only using the data read into the  
memory. Therefore, some functions are re-  
stricted compared with navigation using the  
DVD Map Disc (DVD navi mode). These func-  
tion buttons, which cannot be used in the  
memory navi mode, are indicated in light gray.  
(If you want to use these functions, please in-  
sert the DVD Map Disc again.) In addition, you  
may need to insert the DVD Map Disc and  
store new data in the memory during naviga-  
tion operation, such as when the destination  
is far away.  
5
Press MENU button.  
The adjusted position data is saved.  
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the  
adjusted position data.  
p Press MENU button to complete the 4-point  
adjustment.  
p To cancel the adjustment, press and hold  
MENU button.  
6
Press MENU button.  
The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen  
appears.  
7
Gently touch the center of + mark dis-  
The memory navi mode uses the following  
map data to perform navigation.  
The following are collectively known as Mem-  
ory Data:  
played on the screen with the touch panel  
adjustment pen.  
After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-  
tion data is saved.  
!
Manually downloaded memory area data in  
[Map in Memory] of the Settings menu  
(Manual downloaded Memory Area)  
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the  
adjusted position data.  
p Press MENU button to return to the pre-  
vious adjustment position.  
!
Automatically downloaded memory data of  
the surrounding areas during the route  
search (Auto downloaded Memory Area)  
8
Press and hold MENU button.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
The adjustment is complete.  
p If touch panel adjustment cannot be per-  
formed properly, consult your local Pioneer  
dealer.  
158  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
What is the manual downloaded  
memory area?  
Memory area is the area of the map data that  
the user voluntarily read into the memory for  
the memory navi mode. Normal guidance is  
available if the memory area is stored and you  
drive within the stored area.  
Go to  
1
POI Search  
Vicinity Search  
Address Book  
Destination History  
Freeway Search  
Telephone Search  
Cancel Route  
What is the auto downloaded  
memory area?  
This is the zone around the route in the map  
area that is automatically stored in the mem-  
ory when the route is set. When the route dis-  
tance is 74.5 miles (120 km) or shorter, a zone  
with a width of approximately 10.9 miles  
(17.5 km) around the route is stored.  
When the route distance is longer than  
74.5 miles (120 km), a zone with a width of ap-  
proximately 6.6 miles (10.6 km) around the  
route is recorded.  
This data is transmitted to the memory as you  
set the route. When a new route is entered,  
the memorized data is deleted.  
The data read into the memory will not be de-  
leted even when the vehicles engine is turned  
off.  
Info/Traffic menu  
Traffic On Route  
Traffic Events  
1
1
1
1
1
1
Traffic Flow  
Traffic Settings  
XM Status  
Stock Info  
Set My Favorites  
My Favorites  
Emergency Info  
Overlay POI  
Route Options menu  
Edit Current Route  
View Current Route  
Recalculate  
The memorized area may be deleted in the fol-  
lowing circumstances:  
s
1
1
1
1
1
!
Yellow lead of the navigation system or the  
vehicle battery is disconnected.  
RESET button is pressed.  
Navigation software is updated.  
System language is changed.  
!
!
!
Number of Routes  
Route Condition  
Avoid Freeway  
Avoid Ferry  
Navigation operation during the  
memory navi mode  
Avoid Toll Road  
Designate Areas to Avoid  
Settings menu  
!
!
!
1 : Operation possible  
s : Operation restricted  
: Operation not possible  
Volume  
1
s
1
1
NAVI MENU  
System Options  
Short-Cut Selection  
Map Display Options  
Defined Locations  
Destination menu  
Address Search  
Return Home  
159  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
p Where the navigation guidance is impossi-  
ble, the icon is lit in red. In that case, rein-  
sert the DVD Map Disc.  
Demo Mode  
1
Time  
Modify Current Location  
Hardware Info  
Restore Factory Settings  
1
When  
disappears, memory navi mode is  
ready. You can now remove the DVD Map  
Disc.  
s*  
1
p If you want to remove the DVD Map Disc  
while preparing for the memory navi mode,  
press EJECT button more than 2 seconds.  
When the DVD Map Disc is removed, data  
cannot be read any more and preparation  
for memory navi mode will be canceled ac-  
cordingly. (Since the reading of the map  
data used in the memory navi mode is not  
complete, the map scale may switch to a  
larger scale. In this case, route guidance  
will continue up to the location already  
memorized.)  
In memory navi mode, you will be notified in  
three cases: when the distance to the edge of  
the memorized area is 12 miles (20 km),  
6 miles (10 km) and 3 miles (5 km) respectively.  
Preparation for memory navi mode will have to  
be repeated if the vehicle enters an unrec-  
orded area, then returns to an area stored in  
the disc. (Preparation for the memory navi  
mode starts from the location where the vehi-  
cle re-entered the area stored on the disc.)  
*: Product Number in Service Info Screen is not dis-  
played.  
Shortcut menu  
: Destination  
s
1
1
s
1
1
1
: Change Route  
: Registration  
: Vicinity Search  
: Volume Setting  
: Whole Route Overview  
: Overlay POI  
: Address Book  
: Route Options  
: Edit Current Route  
: Traffic On Route  
: Stock Info  
: Set My Favorites  
: My Favorites  
Major restrictions during the  
memory navi mode  
About the icon for the memory  
navi mode  
When new route guidance starts, the route  
data from the DVD Map Disc is read into the  
memory of the navigation system. The status  
of the memory navi mode is indicated by the  
following icons on the lower right of the map  
screen.  
(Green flashes): Reading the data  
(Green is lit): Operated in memory navi  
mode  
(Red flashes): Operated in memory navi  
mode, but the remaining distance for gui-  
dance is less than 12.5 miles.  
!
!
The scale cannot be zoomed freely.  
If a route was set to your destination in  
memory navi mode, inserting the DVD Map  
Disc automatically starts recalculation of  
another route. (You cannot cancel this re-  
route operation. If the route calculation  
fails for some reason, a message will ap-  
pear asking you to either recalculate a  
route (Reroute) or delete the current route  
(Delete route). In this case, drive for a while  
before touching either Rerouteor De-  
lete routeto delete the current route, then  
reset the destination.)  
160  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
In some cases, you may not be able to use  
map display mode during DVD navi mode.  
If the map display mode is not changed  
during memory navi mode, the display will  
return to the map display mode used dur-  
ing the DVD navi mode when the DVD Map  
Disc is set again.  
In memory navi mode, map scale data that  
cannot be read in the memory cannot be  
displayed. Accordingly, the edge of the  
map will appear cut off along the point it  
was not read into memory. This simply indi-  
cates the edge of the map data, and is not  
a malfunction.  
Cautions relating to auto  
reroute in memory navi mode  
Auto rerouting in memory navi mode is de-  
signed to return you to your original route  
wherever possible.  
In memory navi mode, persistently deviating  
from the route may result in one of the follow-  
ing:  
!
!
A clearly circuitous route  
Leaving a toll road and returning to the toll  
road from where you left it  
In the above case, if the set route seems un-  
suitable, insert the DVD Map Disc that records  
your current position. Setting the DVD Map  
Disc to navigation automatically resets the  
route from your current location to your desti-  
nation.  
TRAFFIC icon during the  
memory navi mode  
!
If you keep driving or scrolling the map to a  
point where the map can no longer be dis-  
played, the scale automatically switches to  
a range possible to display. If you would  
like to continue driving or scrolling the map  
at the same scale, set the DVD Map Disc in  
the navigation system.  
You cannot reroute to avoid traffic conges-  
tion or closure.  
If you continue to drive outside the route  
for a while, you may not be able to perform  
map matching.  
If you deviate from the route during mem-  
ory navi mode, the set route will be re-  
routed, but only to return you to the original  
route calculated within the memorized  
area.  
Although an enlarged map of the intersec-  
tion will be displayed, no special freeway il-  
lustration (illustration of freeway  
!
XM NavTraffic-related data for a Zone”  
(e.g., Zone 1 contain ID, OR, WA) only can  
be memorized. Therefore, if  
on the screen when crossing a zone border,  
you will need to insert the disc to use the  
appears  
XM NavTraffic function. Touching  
al-  
lows you to check the locations of the traf-  
fic information along the route. However,  
you cannot perform rerouting.  
!
!
Operation outside the  
memorized area  
When the vehicle leaves the memorized area,  
the functions will be limited.  
!
!
!
The auto reroute function does not work.  
You can only display a larger scale map.  
The map display will automatically change  
to a 25 miles (or 50 miles) scale.  
!
!
!
The map matching function will not be  
available. Therefore, the position of your ve-  
hicle may be misaligned.  
intersections) will be displayed.  
If the XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT, GEX-  
P920XM), which is sold separately, is con-  
nected, the logo data is not displayed dur-  
ing memory navi mode.  
161  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
The navigation guidance will only be avail-  
able when arriving at your destination.  
Other guidance is not possible (this in-  
cludes no display of direction arrows).  
Positioning by dead reckoning  
The 3D Hybrid Sensor in the navigation system  
also calculates your position. The current loca-  
tion is measured by detecting driving distance  
with the speed pulse, the turning direction  
with the Gyrosensor and inclination of the  
road with the G sensor.  
To cancel these limitations, insert the DVD  
Map Disc to the navigation system.  
The 3D Hybrid Sensor can even calculate  
changes of altitude, and corrects for discre-  
pancies in the distance traveled caused by  
driving along winding roads or up slopes.  
Also, the navigation system learns the driving  
conditions and stores information in the mem-  
ory. Thus, as you drive more, the precision of  
the positioning becomes more accurate.  
The method of positioning changes as follows  
depending on whether the speed pulse of your  
vehicle is detected or not:  
Positioning Technology  
The navigation system accurately measures  
your current location by combining the posi-  
tioning by GPS and by Dead Reckoning.  
Positioning by GPS  
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a  
network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each  
of the satellites, which orbit at a height of  
68 900 000 feet (21 000 km), continually broad-  
casts radio signals giving time and position in-  
formation. This ensures that signals from at  
least three can be picked up from any open  
area on the grounds surface.  
3D hybrid mode  
This is active when the speed pulse is de-  
tected. Inclination of a street can be detected.  
Simple hybrid mode  
The accuracy of the GPS information depends  
on how good the reception is. When the sig-  
nals are strong and reception is good, GPS  
can determine latitude, longitude and altitude  
for accurate positioning in three dimensions.  
But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-  
sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained  
and positioning errors are somewhat greater.  
When the speed pulse is not detected, posi-  
tioning is performed in this mode. Only hori-  
zontal movement is detected, so it becomes  
less accurate. Also, when the positioning by  
GPS is not available, such as when your vehi-  
cle enters a long tunnel, the discrepancy be-  
tween your actual and calculated position may  
become bigger.  
p The speed pulse data comes from the  
speed sensing circuit. The location of this  
speed sensing circuit depends on your ve-  
hicle model. In some cases, it is impossible  
to make a connection to it, and in such a  
case we recommend that ND-PG1 speed  
pulse generator (sold separately) be used.  
162  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Map matching  
How do GPS and dead  
As mentioned, the GPS and dead reckoning  
systems used by this navigation system are  
susceptible to certain errors. Their calcula-  
tions may, on occasion, place you in a location  
on the map where no road exists. In this situa-  
tion, the processing system understands that  
vehicles travel only on roads, and can correct  
your position by adjusting it to a nearby road.  
This is called map matching.  
reckoning work together?  
For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-  
tem continually compares GPS data with your  
estimated position as calculated from the data  
of 3D Hybrid Sensor. However, if only the data  
from the 3D Hybrid Sensor is available for a  
long period, positioning errors are gradually  
compounded until the estimated position be-  
comes unreliable. For this reason, whenever  
GPS signals are available, they are matched  
with the data of the 3D Hybrid Sensor and  
used to correct it for improved accuracy.  
To ensure maximum accuracy, the dead reck-  
oning system learns with experience. By com-  
paring the position it estimates with your  
actual position as obtained using GPS, it can  
correct for various types of error, such as tire  
wear and the rolling motion of your vehicle. As  
you drive, the dead reckoning system gradu-  
ally gathers more data, learns more, and the  
accuracy of its estimates gradually increases.  
So, after you have driven some distance, you  
can expect your position as shown on the map  
to show fewer errors.  
With map matching  
p If you use chains on your wheels for winter  
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors  
may suddenly increase because of differ-  
ence in wheel diameter. The system detects  
the fact that the tire diameter has changed,  
and automatically replaces the value for  
calculating distance.  
Without map matching  
p If ND-PG1 is used or if your vehicle is oper-  
ating in Simple hybrid mode, the distance  
calculation value cannot be replaced auto-  
matically.  
Handling Large Errors  
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by  
combining GPS, Dead Reckoning and map  
matching. However, in some situations, these  
functions may not work properly, and the error  
may become bigger.  
163  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
When the positioning by GPS is  
impossible  
Vehicles that Cannot  
Obtain Speed Pulse Data  
!
If signals cannot be received from more  
than two GPS satellites, GPS positioning  
does not take place.  
p The speed pulse data comes from the  
speed sensing circuit. The location of this  
speed sensing circuit depends on your ve-  
hicle model. In some cases, it is impossible  
to make a connection to it, and in such a  
case we recommend that ND-PG1 speed  
pulse generator (sold separately) be  
used.  
!
In some driving conditions, signals from  
GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.  
In this case, it is impossible for the system  
to use GPS positioning.  
Conditions Likely to Cause  
Noticeable Positioning Errors  
In tunnels or en-  
closed parking  
garages  
Under elevated  
roads or similar  
structures  
For various reasons such as the state of the  
road you are traveling on and the state of re-  
ception of the GPS signal, the actual position  
of your vehicle may differ from the position  
displayed on the map screen.  
!
!
If you make a shallow turn.  
If there is a parallel road.  
When driving  
among high build-  
ings  
When driving through  
a dense forest or tall  
trees  
!
!
If a car phone or cellular phone is used  
near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may  
be lost temporarily.  
Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray  
paint or car wax, because this may block  
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup  
can also degrade the signals, so keep the  
antenna clear.  
p If, for any reason, GPS signals cannot be re-  
ceived, learning and error correction are  
not possible. If GPS positioning has been  
operating for only a short time, your vehi-  
cles actual position and the current loca-  
tion mark on the map may diverge  
considerably. Once GPS reception is re-  
stored, accuracy will be recovered.  
164  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
If there is another road very nearby, such  
as in the case of an elevated freeway.  
!
If there is a loop or similar road configura-  
tion.  
!
If you take a recently opened road that is  
not on the map.  
!
!
If you take a ferry.  
If you are driving on a long, straight road or  
a gently curving road.  
!
!
If you drive in zig-zags.  
!
If you are on a steep mountain road with  
many height changes.  
If the road has connected hairpin bends.  
165  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot  
or similar structure using a spiral ramp.  
!
If trees or other obstacles block the GPS  
signals for a considerable period.  
!
If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-  
stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.  
!
If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-  
milar structure.  
!
If you join the road after driving around a  
large parking lot.  
!
If your vehicles wheels spin, such as on a  
gravel road or in snow.  
!
When you pass around a traffic circle.  
!
If you put on chains, or change your tires  
for ones with a different size.  
!
!
When starting driving immediately after  
starting the engine.  
If you insert the disc and turn your naviga-  
tion system on while driving.  
166  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Some types of vehicles may not output a  
speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-  
meters per hour. In such a case, the current lo-  
cation of your vehicle may not be displayed  
correctly while in a traffic congestion or in a  
parking lot.  
!
!
In case of POI Search and Vicinity Search,  
only City Centersearch is possible.  
If you cannot search in a currently selected  
zone, the system may forcibly switch to the  
zone selection screen.  
A Freeway Search covers all areas, regard-  
less of the disc on which the information is  
stored.  
If a Vicinity Search is performed on the  
border of an area not stored on the disc,  
the system will not necessarily select the  
nearest facility. (The search will take place  
only within the range of areas stored on the  
disc.)  
!
!
About the Data being Deleted  
The information is erased by pushing RESET  
button or disconnect yellow lead from battery  
(or remove the battery itself), except for the fol-  
lowing items.  
!
!
!
Sensor learning status and driving status  
Memory area memorized manually  
Registered area in Designate Areas to  
Avoid  
Guidance  
!
When your vehicle approaches an area not  
stored on the disc, you will be notified three  
times: when the distance to the area not  
stored on the disc is 12 miles (20 km),  
6 miles (10 km) and 3 miles (5 km) respec-  
tively. When your vehicle enters that area, a  
caution is given.  
In the areas not stored on the disc, only  
guidance for reaching the destination is  
provided. No other guidance is given.  
If a route calculation is operated within an  
areas not stored on the disc, the route  
might not be set from the streets you are  
currently driving. Also, if you set the desti-  
nation in an area not stored on the disc of  
the disc, the system may not be able to set  
the route up to the destination.  
If the vehicle deviates from the set route in  
an area not stored on the disc, the Auto Re-  
route function will not work.  
Even if [Close-up of Junction] is [On], the  
display will not switch to an enlarged map  
of the junction.  
Even if you drive on the freeway, lane infor-  
mation, freeway exit numbers and freeway  
signs will not be displayed.  
!
Registered Locations in Address Book  
Limitation of Functions for  
Areas not Stored on the Disc  
For areas not stored on the disc, the functions  
will operate as follows:  
!
!
Displaying the map  
!
Maps with a scale of between 0.02 mile and  
0.25 mile cannot be displayed. (If the scale  
was set to between 0.02 mile and 0.25 mile,  
it is automatically switched to 0.5 mile.)  
When driving with Guide View, Route  
View or Drivers View, upon entering an  
area not stored on the disc the display  
automatically switches to Map View.  
(When the vehicle reenters an area stored  
on the disc, the display returns to the pre-  
vious map mode except for Drivers View.)  
!
!
!
!
Destination search  
!
You cannot search a destination in an area  
not stored on the disc using Address  
Search or Telephone Search.  
167  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Route information  
Handling and Care of the Disc  
Some basic precautions are necessary when  
handling your discs.  
!
If the set route goes through an area not  
stored on the disc, no route profile for that  
area will be displayed. (If the set route tra-  
verses both an area not stored on the disc  
and area stored on the disc, only the route  
profile within the area stored on the disc  
will be displayed.)  
DVD Map Discs  
!
Do not use discs other than those intended  
for this product. Use only discs approved  
by Pioneer.  
!
Route scrolling for an area not stored on  
the disc is possible only with a map scale  
of 0.5 mile or above.  
p If you wish to use other DVD Map Discs,  
first check that they are compatible with  
this equipment and approved by  
Pioneer.  
Other function limitations  
Overlay POI  
DVD drive and care  
!
Only display City Centeris available in  
an area not stored on the disc.  
!
Use only normal, round discs. If you insert  
irregular, non-round, shaped discs they  
may jam in the DVD drive or not play prop-  
erly.  
Memory mode  
!
Only data for areas stored on the disc can  
be memorized. (Data for areas not stored  
on the disc cannot be memorized.)  
!
If the vehicle enters an area not stored on  
the disc, preparation for memory navi  
mode will have to be redone after the vehi-  
cle returns to an area stored in the disc.  
(Preparation for the memory navi mode  
starts from the location where the vehicle  
re-entered the area stored on the disc.)  
!
!
Check all discs for cracks, scratches or  
warping before playing. Discs that have  
cracks, scratches or are warped may not  
play properly. Do not use such discs.  
Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed  
side) surface when handling the disc.  
Store discs in their cases when not in use.  
Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do  
not expose the discs to high temperatures.  
Do not attach labels to, write on or apply  
chemicals to the surface of the discs.  
To clean dirt from a disc, wipe the disc with  
a soft cloth outward from the center of the  
disc.  
!
!
Avoid area  
!
An area not stored on the disc cannot be  
set as an Area to Avoid.  
!
!
p A set Designate Areas to Avoid may be  
deleted when the software is updated. If  
this happens, the system will automatically  
try to recover the deleted information, but  
data can be recovered only for areas stored  
on the disc. For items that could not be re-  
covered, a recovery process will begin  
when you set another disc.  
168  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
If the heater is used in cold weather, con-  
densation may form on components inside  
the DVD drive. Condensation may cause  
the DVD drive to operate incorrectly. If you  
think that condensation is a problem, turn  
off the DVD drive for an hour or so to allow  
the DVD drive to dry out, and wipe any  
damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the  
moisture.  
!
!
When DVD-R/DVD-RW discs are used,  
playback is possible only for discs which  
have been recorded with the Video format  
(video mode). It is not possible to play back  
DVD-R/RW discs which have been re-  
corded with the Video Recording format  
(VR mode).  
It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/  
DVD-RW discs which have been recorded  
with the Video format (video mode), be-  
cause of disc characteristics, scratches or  
dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc.  
on the lens of this product.  
It is not possible to read DVD-ROM discs  
other than Pioneer DVD map discs or DVD-  
ROMs with MP3, WMA, AAC, or DivX files  
burned to it.  
Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.  
DVD-Video  
!
With some DVD-Video discs, it may not be  
possible to use certain functions.  
It may not be possible to play back some  
DVD-Video discs.  
!
!
!
This product can play back the disc that fi-  
nalized with the following file systems (logi-  
cal format):  
CD: ISO9660 level 1 and level 2, Romeo  
and Joliet  
DVD-R/-RW and CD-R/-RW  
!
Playback is possible only for discs which  
have been finalized.  
!
Playback of discs finalized on a personal  
computer may not be possible depending  
on the application settings and the environ-  
ment. Please finalized with the correct for-  
mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer  
of the application.)  
It may not be possible to playback discs re-  
corded on a music CD recorder, DVD recor-  
der or a personal computer because of disc  
characteristics, scratches or dirt on the  
disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens  
of this product.  
Playback of discs may become impossible  
in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high  
temperatures, or the storage conditions in  
the vehicle.  
Titles and other text information recorded  
on a disc may not be displayed by this pro-  
duct.  
DVD: ISO9660 level 1 and level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, UDF1.02.  
!
When you burn a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-  
RW, make sure the total data size of the  
CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW is greater than  
the amount noted below by storing dummy  
data or other filler information. Otherwise,  
the disc may not be recognized by the built-  
in DVD drive.  
!
!
CD-R/-RW: 1.8 MB  
DVD-R/-RW: 170 MB  
About playing DualDisc  
!
DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a  
recordable CD for audio on one side and a  
recordable DVD for video on the other.  
Playback of the DVD side is possible with  
this unit. However, since the CD side of  
DualDiscs is not physically compatible with  
the general CD standard, it may not be pos-  
sible to play the CD side with this naviga-  
tion system.  
!
!
!
If you insert a CD-RW/DVD-RW disc into  
this product, time to playback will be longer  
than when you insert a conventional CD/  
DVD or CD-R/DVD-R disc.  
Read the precautions with the package of  
discs before using them.  
!
!
Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual-  
Disc may result in scratches on the disc.  
169  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-  
blems on this navigation system. In some  
cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in  
the disc loading slot and will not eject. To  
prevent this, we recommend you refrain  
from using DualDisc with this navigation  
system.  
!
Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge  
into one another without a pause. When  
these discs are converted to MP3/WMA/  
AAC files and burned to a disc, the files will  
be played back on this player with a short  
pause between each one, regardless of the  
length of the pause between tracks on the  
original audio CD.  
The sound quality of MP3/WMA/AAC files  
generally becomes better with an increased  
bit rate. In order to be able to enjoy sound  
of a certain quality, we recommend using  
discs recorded with a higher bit rate.  
This unit plays back files with the filename  
extension (.mp3, .wma or .m4a) as an MP3/  
WMA/AAC file. To prevent noise and mal-  
functions, do not use these extensions for  
files other than MP3/WMA/AAC files.  
!
Please refer to the manufacturer for more  
detailed information about DualDiscs.  
!
!
MP3, WMA and AAC files  
!
WMA data can be encoded by using  
Windows Media Player version 7 or later.  
The navigation system may not operate cor-  
rectly depending on the application used to  
encode WMA files.  
Depending on the version of Windows  
Media Player used to encode WMA files,  
album names and other text information  
may not be correctly displayed.  
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of WMA/AAC files encoded with  
image data.  
It is possible to play back multi-session  
compatible recorded discs.  
!
!
!
MP3 additional information  
!
Files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver.  
1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 formats for display  
of album (disc title), track (track title), artist  
(track artist) and comments. Ver. 2.x of ID3  
Tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and  
Ver. 2.x exist.  
You can play back MP3 files in the frequen-  
cies from 8 kHz to 48 kHz.  
This unit is compatible with the emphasis  
function.  
There is no m3u playlist compatibility.  
There is no compatibility with the MP3i  
(MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO formats.  
This unit can play recordings with bit rates  
from 8 kbps to 320 kbps.  
!
!
!
MP3/WMA/AAC files are not compatible  
with packet write data transfer.  
!
!
The maximum number of characters for  
the file and folder name is 64 characters,  
including extension (.mp3). However the  
navigation system uses proportional font.  
Therefore, the number of the characters  
that you can display varies according to the  
width of each character.  
In case of files recorded according to the  
Romeo file system, only the first 64 charac-  
ters can be displayed.  
The folder selection sequence for playback  
and other operations becomes the writing  
sequence used by the writing software. For  
this reason, the expected sequence at the  
time of playback may not coincide with the  
actual playback sequence. However, there  
also is some writing software which per-  
mits setting of the playback order.  
!
!
!
!
!
WMA additional information  
!
This unit plays back WMA files encoded by  
Windows Media Player version 7, 7.1, 8, 9  
and 10.  
You can play back WMA files in the fre-  
quencies from 8 kHz to 48 kHz.  
This unit can play recordings with bit rates  
from 5 kbps to 320 kbps.  
!
!
170  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
This unit doesnt support the following for-  
mats:  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional  
(5.1ch)  
Windows Media Audio 9 Lossless  
Windows Media Audio 9 Voice  
AAC additional information  
!
!
!
This unit plays back AAC files encoded by  
iTunes® version 4.6.  
This unit plays back AAC files in the sam-  
pling frequencies from 8 kHz to 48 kHz.  
This unit can play recordings with trans-  
mission rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps.  
About folders and MP3/WMA/AAC files  
!
An outline of a disc with MP3/WMA/AAC  
files on it is shown below. Subfolders are  
shown as folders in the folder currently se-  
lected.  
p The following figure is an example of the  
tier structure in the disc. The numbers in  
the figure indicate the order in which folder  
numbers are assigned and the order to be  
played back.  
1
2
3
1 First tier  
2 Second tier  
3 Third tier  
Indicates the order in which folder num-  
bers are assigned.  
Indicates each file. The number is as-  
signed in the order of the track to be played  
back.  
Notes  
!
!
This unit assigns folder numbers. The user  
cannot assign folder numbers.  
It is not possible to check folders that do not  
include MP3/WMA/AAC files. (These folders  
will be skipped without displaying the folder  
number.)  
!
It is possible to play back up to 255 folders on  
one disc.  
DivX video files  
!
This unit corresponds to DivX video format  
implemented in relation to DivX standards.  
However, it does not correspond to DivX  
Ultra standards.  
!
This unit corresponds to MP3 and AC3  
audio codec.  
171  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
DivX files without video data cannot be re-  
cognized as DivX file.  
Depending on the file information composi-  
tion such as the number of audio stream,  
there may be a slight delay in the start of  
playback on discs.  
Some special operation may be prohibited  
because of the composition of DivX files.  
DivX files downloaded only from DivX part-  
ner site are guarantee of proper operation.  
Unauthorized DivX file may not operate  
properly.  
DRM rental file cannot be operated until  
starting playing back.  
This unit corresponds to a DivX file display  
up to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds. Also,  
search operation beyond this time limit is  
prohibited.  
This unit corresponds to media with a maxi-  
mum image size of 720 × 576 pixels.  
If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback  
is stopped on the way.  
Files with high transfer rates may not be  
played back correctly. The standard transfer  
rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and 10.08 Mbps for  
DVDs.  
DivX subtitle files  
!
Srt format subtitle files with the extension  
.srtcan be used.  
!
Only one subtitle file can be used for each  
DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be  
associated.  
!
!
!
Subtitle files that are named with the same  
character string as the DivX file before the  
extension are associated with the DivX file.  
The character strings before the extension  
must be exactly the same. However, if there  
is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in  
a single folder, the files are associated even  
if the file names are not the same.  
The subtitle file must be stored in the same  
folder as the DivX file.  
Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any  
more subtitle files will not be recognized.  
Up to 64 characters can be used for the  
name of the subtitle file, including the ex-  
tension. If more than 64 characters are  
used for the file name, the subtitle file may  
not be recognized.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
The character code for the subtitle file  
should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-  
acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the  
characters to be displayed incorrectly.  
The subtitles may not be displayed correctly  
if the displayed characters in the subtitle  
file include control code.  
For materials that use a high transfer rate,  
the subtitles and video may not be comple-  
tely synchronized.  
!
DivX VOD file playback requires ID code of  
this unit to DivX VOD provider. About ID  
code, refer to Displaying your DivX® VOD re-  
!
!
!
!
!
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including  
DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX®  
media files.  
For more details about DivX, visit the follow-  
ing site:  
http://www.divx.com/  
If multiple subtitles are programmed to dis-  
play within a very short time frame, such as  
0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-  
played at the correct time.  
Important  
!
!
When naming a DivX video file, add the corre-  
sponding filename extension (.avi or .divx).  
The navigation system plays back files with  
the filename extension (.avi or .divx) as a DivX  
video file. To prevent noise and malfunctions,  
do not use these extensions for files other  
than DivX video files.  
Ambient conditions for playing  
a disc  
!
At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-  
ture cutout protects this product by switch-  
ing it off automatically.  
172  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
Despite our careful design of the product,  
small scratches that do not affect actual  
operation may appear on the disc surface  
as a result of mechanical wear, ambient  
conditions for use or handling of the disc.  
This is not a sign of the malfunction of this  
product. Consider it to be normal wear and  
tear.  
!
The LCD screen should be used within the  
temperature ranges shown below:  
Operating temperature range: +14 °F to  
+122 °F  
Storage temperature range: -4 °F to  
+176 °F  
Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures  
higher or lower than the operating tem-  
perature range because the LCD screen  
may not operate normally and the LCD  
screen can be damaged.  
The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-  
crease its visibility within the vehicle.  
Please do not press strongly on it as this  
may damage it.  
!
!
Using the Navigation  
System Correctly  
WARNING  
!
!
!
If liquid or foreign matter should get inside  
this navigation system, park your vehicle to  
safe place and turn the ignition switch off  
(ACC OFF) immediately and consult your deal-  
er or the nearest authorized Pioneer Service  
Station. Do not use the navigation system in  
this condition because doing so may result in  
a fire, electric shock, or other failure.  
!
!
Do not push the LCD screen with excessive  
force as this may scratch it.  
Never touch the LCD screen with anything  
besides your finger when operating the  
Touch Panel functions. The LCD screen can  
scratch easily. (The stylus is supplied for  
special calibrations. Do not use the stylus  
for normal operation.)  
If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell  
from the navigation system, or any other ab-  
normal signs on the LCD screen, turn off the  
power immediately and consult your dealer or  
the nearest authorized Pioneer Service Sta-  
tion. Using this navigation system in this con-  
dition may result in permanent damage to the  
system.  
Do not disassemble or modify this navigation  
system, as there are high-voltage components  
inside which may cause an electric shock. Be  
sure to consult your dealer or the nearest  
authorized Pioneer Service Station for internal  
inspection, adjustments or repairs.  
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen  
!
If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air  
conditioner, make sure that air from the air  
conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from  
the heater may break the LCD screen, and  
cool air from the cooler may cause moist-  
ure to form inside the navigation unit, re-  
sulting in possible damage. Also, if the  
LCD screen is cooled down by the air con-  
ditioner, the LCD screen may become dark  
or the life span of the small fluorescent  
tube used in the LCD screen may be shor-  
tened.  
!
!
Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)  
may appear on the LCD screen. These are  
due to the characteristics of the LCD  
screen and do not indicate a problem with  
the LCD screen.  
At low temperatures, the LCD screen may  
be dark for a while after the power is turned  
on.  
Handling the LCD screen  
!
When the LCD screen is subjected to direct  
sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-  
come very hot, resulting in possible da-  
mage to the LCD screen. When not using  
this navigation system, avoid exposing it to  
direct sunlight as much as possible.  
173  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is  
exposed to direct sunlight.  
CAUTION  
When a route is calculated, the route and voice  
guidance for the route are automatically set.  
Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-  
mation about traffic regulations at the time when  
the route was calculated is shown. One-way  
streets and street closures may not be taken into  
consideration. For example, if a street is open dur-  
ing the morning only, but you arrive later, it would  
be against the traffic regulations so you cannot  
drive along the set route. When driving, please  
follow the actual traffic signs. Also, the system  
may not know some traffic regulations.  
When using a cellular phone, keep the an-  
tenna of the cellular phone away from the  
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the  
video by the appearance of spots, colored  
stripes, etc.  
Keeping the LCD screen in good  
condition  
!
When removing dust from the LCD screen  
or cleaning the LCD screen, first turn the  
system power off, then wipe with a soft dry  
cloth.  
!
When wiping the LCD screen, take care not  
to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or  
abrasive chemical cleaners.  
About singular route calculation  
When the calculation of only one route is set,  
you can search a route option by combining  
the following conditions.  
For details concerning operations, refer to  
For example, when [Fast] and [Avoid Free-  
way] ([On]) are combined, a route that avoids  
freeways and has the shortest travel time will  
be calculated and displayed on the screen.  
Condition 1: whether to put priority on dis-  
tance or time  
Small fluorescent tube  
!
A small fluorescent tube is used inside the  
display to illuminate the LCD screen.  
The fluorescent tube should last for ap-  
proximately 10 000 hours, depending on  
operating conditions. (Using the naviga-  
tion unit at low temperatures reduces  
the service life of the fluorescent tube.)  
When the fluorescent tube reaches the  
end of its useful life, the LCD screen will  
be dark and the image will no longer be  
projected. If this happens, consult your  
dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer  
service station.  
Short:  
Calculate a route with the shortest distance to  
your destination as a priority.  
Fast:  
Calculate a route with the shortest travel time  
to your destination as a priority.  
Condition 2: whether to use freeway or not  
Avoid Freeway:  
Calculate a route that avoids freeways. (A  
route using the freeway may be set if your des-  
tination is far away.)  
Route Setting Information  
Route search specifications  
Your navigation system sets a route to your  
destination by applying certain built-in rules to  
the map data. This section provides some use-  
ful information about how a route is set.  
174  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
The system assumes that the driver de-  
viated either intentionally or inadvertently  
from the route and searches for another  
route (intelligent rerouting). Depending on  
the situation, the system may search for a  
new route that does not return to the origi-  
nal one.  
The calculated route is one example of the  
route to your destination decided by the na-  
vigation system while taking the type of  
streets or traffic regulations into account. It  
is not necessarily an optimum route. (In  
some cases, you may not be able to set the  
streets you want to pass. If you want to  
pass a certain street, set the way point on  
that street.)  
The route set by your navigation system is  
based on the assumption that the driver  
does not know the area. Thus, streets  
known to local drivers, such as small  
streets or special roads, may not be used  
for the set route.  
Some route options may become the same  
route. If way points are set, only one route  
is calculated.  
!
!
In some cases, guidance may direct you  
past your destination and then indicate a  
U-turn to get back to it.  
In some cases, a route may begin on the  
opposite side of a railway or river from your  
actual current location. If this happens,  
drive towards your destination for a while,  
and try route calculation again.  
In the following cases, a route that passes  
through an Area to Avoid may be set:  
when your vehicle is in the Area to  
Avoid  
!
when your destination or way points are  
in the Area to Avoid  
when it is not possible to avoid doing so  
If a suitable route cannot be set in compli-  
ance with the specified detour distance, or  
your preference to avoid freeways, toll  
roads or ferry routes, the setting or para-  
meter may be ignored.  
When there is a traffic congestion or clo-  
sure ahead, if driving through the traffic  
congestion or closure is better than taking  
the detour, a detour route may not be set.  
There may be instances when the starting  
point and the destination point are not on  
the highlighted route.  
The number of traffic circle exits displayed  
on the screen may differ from the actual  
number of roads.  
If the intersection is approached in a gentle  
curve, the map displayed may differ from  
the actual road layout.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Route setting is limited to the range of the  
disc in use.  
The destination is too far, there may be in-  
stances where the route cannot be set. (If  
you want to set a long-distance route going  
across several areas, set way points along  
the way.)  
!
During voice guidance, turns and intersec-  
tions from the freeway are announced.  
However, some intersections, turns, and  
other guide points may not be announced  
if they are passed in rapid succession.  
It is possible that guidance may direct you  
off a freeway and then back on again.  
In some cases, the set route may require  
you to travel in the opposite direction of  
your current heading. In such cases, you  
are instructed to turn around; please do so  
safely and in accordance with local traffic  
rules.  
Auto Reroute  
!
Auto Reroute is used when you deviate  
more than 0.01 mile (30 m) from the route.  
The Auto Reroute function does not work in  
the following cases:  
when your vehicle is not on a street  
when you are very close to your destina-  
tion  
when your vehicle is on a ferry  
when driving on a road inside a facility  
when driving on a traffic circle  
!
!
!
175  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
when your vehicle is out of Memory  
area  
when the vehicle goes out of the area  
stored in the disc during DVD naviga-  
tion mode  
Types of the Road Stored in  
the Disc  
There are three types of roads marked on the  
map of this disc.  
when the vehicle goes out of the mem-  
orized area during memory navi mode  
when driving on routes described in  
Roads included in the route  
guidance and roads not included  
Turn by Turn Routable Roads contain full attri-  
bute data and can be used for full Route Gui-  
dance. Pioneer Navigation will display full  
route guidance, including turn-by-turn voice  
directions and arrow icons.  
Route highlighting  
!
Once set, the route is highlighted in bright  
green or light blue on the map.  
Routable roads (routes displayed and  
highlighted in purple) have only basic data  
and can only be used to plot a navigable route.  
Pioneer Navigation will only display a navig-  
able route on the map (only the arrival gui-  
dance for the destination or a way point is  
available). Please review and obey all local traf-  
fic rules along the highlighted route. (For your  
safety.)  
!
The immediate vicinity of your starting  
point and destination may not be high-  
lighted, and neither will areas with particu-  
larly complex road layouts. Consequently,  
the route may appear to be cut off on the  
display, but voice guidance will continue.  
Roads not used in calculations  
Even though displayed onscreen, the following  
roads are not included in route calculations:  
No turn-by-turn directions or arrow icons will  
be displayed on these roads.  
!
!
!
!
Stubble roads  
Walkways  
Roads for public vehicles only  
Non routable road  
When your vehicle reaches to the entrance of  
this road, the icon will be displayed, indicat-  
ing that guidance is not available for this type  
of road. The icon will be indicated for the  
road with which the guidance is available.  
Close-up of Junction function, Auto Reroute  
function, Changing the view to Guide View,  
or Route View are not available.  
Tracking  
!
Your navigation system marks your course  
on the map in certain increments. This is  
called tracking. It is handy when you want  
to check a route traveled without guidance  
or if returning along a complex route.  
A maximum of about 145 miles (230 km) is  
marked and, as you travel beyond this limit,  
tracking marks are erased, starting with the  
oldest. The tracking display shows about  
100 miles of vehicle tracking with white  
dots.  
Non routable roads (pink color  
road)  
Map display is possible, but it cannot be used  
for route calculation. Please review and obey  
all local traffic rules along this route. (For your  
safety.)  
!
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
176  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Display Information  
*1: If you touch [Restore Factory Settings],  
the registered POI Shortcuts return to the de-  
fault or factory settings.  
*2: If you touch [Restore Factory Settings],  
the setting value return to the default or fac-  
tory settings.  
Page  
Traffic On Route  
Traffic Events  
Traffic Flow*2  
Traffic Settings*2  
XM Status  
Stock Info  
NAVI MENU  
Destination  
Set My Favorites  
My Favorites  
Emergency Info  
Overlay POI*1  
Route Options  
Page  
Address Search  
Return Home  
Go to  
POI Search  
Page  
Vicinity Search*1  
Address Book  
Destination History  
Freeway Search  
Telephone Search  
Cancel Route  
Edit Current Route  
View Current Route  
Recalculate  
Number of Routes*2  
Route Condition*2  
Avoid Freeway*2  
Avoid Ferry*2  
Info/Traffic  
Avoid Toll Road*2  
Designate Areas to Avoid  
177  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Settings  
Shortcut menu  
p The shortcuts displayed onscreen can be  
changed. The shortcuts described here are  
those that can be selected with the system  
as default setting.  
p Items marked with an asterisk (*3) cannot  
be removed from Shortcut menu.  
Page  
Shortcut menu  
Volume*2  
System Options  
Page  
Language Selection  
: Destination*3  
: Change Route*3  
Reroute  
KM / Mile Setting*2  
Average Speed*2  
Background Picture Setting  
Read from Disc  
Cancel Route  
Route Profile  
Route Scroll  
Shortcut menu  
Map Display Options*2  
Tracking Display*2  
AV Guide Mode*2  
Day/Night Display*2  
Close-up of Junction*2  
Arrow in AV*2  
Skip Way Point  
1 km (mile) - 50 km (mile) de-  
tour  
: Registration  
: Vicinity Search*1  
: Volume Setting  
: Whole Route Overview  
: Overlay POI*1  
: Address Book  
: Route Options  
Route Options  
Defined Locations  
Set Home”  
Map in Memory  
Set Go To”  
Demo Mode*2  
: Edit Current Route  
: Traffic On Route  
: Stock Info  
Time  
Modify Current Location  
Hardware Info  
: Set My Favorites  
: My Favorites  
Connection Status  
3D Calibration  
Service Info Screen  
Restore Factory Settings  
178  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
System menu  
Menu in the AV Screen  
Sound menu  
Page  
AV1 Input  
AV2 Input  
Camera  
Page  
FAD/BAL (Balance)  
EQ Menu  
Camera  
Staging  
Polarity  
Loudness  
Antenna Control  
Wide Mode  
V.Adjust  
Sub Woofer (Non Fading)  
HPF  
SLA  
Screen Off  
Illumi Color  
Screen Color  
Initial menu  
Function menu  
DVD-V  
Page  
Rear SP  
Rear SP  
Preout  
Page  
PIN Edit  
Repeat  
Mute Input/Guide  
5.1CH  
L/R Select  
DVD/DivX Setup  
179  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
CD/ROM  
M-DVD  
Page  
Page  
Repeat  
Random  
Scan  
Repeat  
Random  
Scan  
DivX  
USB  
Page  
Page  
Repeat  
Repeat  
Random  
Scan  
DVD/DivX Setup  
RADIO  
XM  
Page  
BSM  
Page  
Local  
Memo  
180  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
SIRIUS  
iPod  
Page  
Page  
Memo  
Repeat  
Game Alert  
Game Info  
Shuffle  
Wide Screen  
iPod Charge  
BT-TEL  
BT-AUDIO  
Page  
Phone Connect  
Phone Register  
Phonebook Transfer  
Phonebook Name View  
Clear Memory  
Auto Answer  
Page  
Connection Open  
Disconnect  
Device Info  
Refuse All Calls  
Ring Tone  
Auto Connect  
Echo Cancel  
181  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
DVD/DivX Setup menu  
Glossary  
3D Hybrid sensor  
The built-in sensor which enables the system  
to estimate your vehicles position. A learning  
function increases its accuracy and its learn-  
ing data can be stored in memory.  
AAC  
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4.  
Page  
Language  
Subtitle Language  
Audio Language  
Menu Language  
Assist Subtitle  
Multi Angle  
TV Aspect  
Address Book  
A list of locations registered manually.  
Aspect ratio  
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.  
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of  
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional  
presence and atmosphere.  
Parental  
DivX VOD  
Bit rate  
Auto Play  
This expresses data volume per second, or bps  
units (bits per second). The higher the rate,  
the more information is available to reproduce  
the sound. Using the same encoding method  
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better  
the sound.  
Subtitle File  
Chapter  
DVD titles are divided into chapters which are  
numbered in the same way as the chapters of  
a book. With DVD-Video discs featuring chap-  
ters, you can quickly find a desired scene with  
chapter search.  
Current location  
The present location of your vehicle; your cur-  
rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-  
angle.  
Default setting  
A factory setting which applies when you first  
switch on the system; you can change default  
settings to suit your own needs in Route Op-  
tions menu or Settings menu.  
182  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Destination  
Guidance mode  
A location you choose as the end point of your  
journey.  
The mode in which guidance is given as you  
drive to your destination; the system automati-  
cally switches to this mode as soon as a route  
has been set.  
DivX  
DivX is a popular media technology created by  
DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com-  
pressed video with high visual quality that  
maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files  
can also include advanced media features like  
menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.  
Many DivX media files are available for down-  
load online, and you can create your own  
using your personal content and easy-to-use  
tools from DivX.com.  
Guidance point  
These are important landmarks along your  
route, generally intersections. The next gui-  
dance point along your route is indicated on  
the map by the yellow flag icon.  
Home location  
Your registered home location.  
ID3 tag  
This is a method of embedding track-related  
information in a MP3 file. This embedded in-  
formation can include the track title, the ar-  
tists name, the album title, the music genre,  
the year of production, comments and other  
data. The contents can be freely edited using  
software with ID3 Tag editing functions.  
Although the tags are restricted to the number  
of characters, the information can be viewed  
when the track is played back.  
DivX Certified  
DivX Certified products are officially tested by  
the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all  
versions of DivX video, including DivX 6.  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio  
from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is  
the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound  
system used in theaters.  
DRM  
ISO9660 format  
This technology preserves the copyrights for  
digital data by limiting the number of copies  
that can be made for audio and video files.  
This is the international standard for the for-  
mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.  
For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations  
for the following two levels:  
DVD Map Discs  
Level 1:  
The DVD-ROM discs contain Pioneer naviga-  
tion software. Map data is also recorded on  
the discs.  
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con-  
sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English  
capital letters, half-byte numerals and the _”  
sign, with a file-extension of three characters).  
Level 2:  
The file name can have up to 31 characters (in-  
cluding the separation mark .and a file ex-  
tension). Each folder contains less than 8  
hierarchies.  
Extended formats  
Joliet:  
File names can have up to 64 characters.  
Romeo:  
Favorite location  
A frequently visited location (such as your  
workplace or a relatives home) that you can  
register to allow easy routing.  
GPS  
Global Positioning System. A network of satel-  
lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-  
ety of purposes.  
File names can have up to 128 characters.  
183  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
JPEG  
Multi-session  
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts  
Group, and is an international still image com-  
pression standard.  
Multi-session is a recording method that al-  
lows additional data to be recorded later.  
When recording data on a CD-ROM, etc., all  
data from beginning to end is treated as a sin-  
gle unit or session. Multi-session is a method  
of recording more than 2 sessions on one  
disc.  
Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code  
modulation  
This stands for linear pulse code modulation,  
which is the signal recording system used for  
music CDs and DVDs. Generally, DVDs are re-  
corded with higher sampling frequency and  
bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide  
higher sound quality.  
Multi-subtitle  
Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re-  
corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as  
desired.  
m3u  
Optical digital output  
Playlists created using the WINAMPsoft-  
ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).  
By transmitting audio signals in a digital sig-  
nal format, the chance of sonic quality dete-  
riorating in the course of transmission is  
minimized. An optical digital output is de-  
signed to transmit digital signals optically.  
MP3  
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an  
audio compression standard set by a working  
group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan-  
dards Organization). MP3 is able to compress  
audio data to about 1/10th the size of a con-  
ventional disc.  
Packet write  
This is a general term for a method of writing  
on CD-R, etc. at the time required for a file,  
just as is done with files on floppy or hard  
discs.  
MPEG  
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts  
Group, and is an international video image  
compression standard. Some DVDs feature di-  
gital audio compressed and recorded using  
this system.  
Parental lock  
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-  
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-  
vents children from viewing such scenes. With  
this kind of disc, if you set the units parental  
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for  
children will be disabled, or these scenes will  
be skipped.  
Multi-angle  
With regular TV programs, although multiple  
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot  
scenes, only images from one camera at a  
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs  
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-  
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.  
Point of Interest (POI)  
Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations  
stored in the data, such as railway stations,  
shops, restaurants, and amusement parks.  
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)  
Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi-  
ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages  
can be recorded on a single disc, letting you  
choose as desired.  
Region number  
DVD players and DVD discs feature region  
numbers indicating the area in which they  
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-  
sible unless it features the same region num-  
ber as the DVD player.  
184  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Route setting  
Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
The process of determining the ideal route to a  
specific location; route setting is done auto-  
matically by the system when you specify a  
destination.  
Set route  
The route marked out by the system to your  
destination. It is highlighted on the map.  
Title  
DVD-Video discs have a high data capacity, en-  
abling recording of multiple movies on a sin-  
gle disc. If, for example, one disc contains  
three separate movies, they are divided into  
title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the  
convenience of title search and other func-  
tions.  
Tracking  
Dots on the map indicating the route you have  
traveled.  
VBR  
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally  
speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more  
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit  
rate according to the needs of the audio com-  
pression, it is possible to achieve compression  
with a priority on sound quality.  
Voice guidance  
The giving of directions by a recorded voice in  
guidance mode.  
Way Point  
A location that you choose to visit before your  
destination; a journey can be built up from  
multiple way points and the destination.  
WMA  
WMA is short for Windows MediaAudio  
and refers to an audio compression technol-  
ogy that is developed by Microsoft  
Corporation.  
WMA data can be encoded by using Windows  
Media Player version 7 or later.  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra-  
demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
185  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Weight ................................ 105 g (0.23 lbs)  
Specifications  
Display  
General  
Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 7 inch wide/16:9  
(effective display area:  
Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC  
(allowable voltage range:  
10.8 V to 15.1 V DC)  
Grounding system ................... Negative type  
156 mm × 89 mm) (6-1/8 in.  
× 3-1/2 in.)  
Pixels ............................................. 336 960 (1 440 × 234)  
Type ................................................ TFT active matrix, transmis-  
sive type  
Max. current consumption  
........................................... 10.0 A  
Display unit:  
Color system .............................. NTSC compatible  
Operating temperature range  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
DIN  
..................................................... +14 °F to +122 °F  
Storage temperature range  
Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 50 mm ×  
160 mm  
..................................................... -4 °F to +176 °F  
Angle adjustment .................... 50° to 110°  
(initial settings: 90°)  
(7 in. × 2 in. × 6-1/4 in.)  
Nose ........................... 188 mm × 58 mm × 33 mm  
(7-3/8 in. × 2-1/4 in. ×  
1-3/8 in.)  
Audio  
D
Continuous power output is 22 W per channel minimum  
into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
with no more than 5% THD.  
Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4  
50 W × 2 ch/4 W + 70 W ×  
1 ch/2 W (for subwoofer)  
Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 50 mm ×  
165 mm  
(7 in. × 2 in. × 6-1/2 in.)  
Nose ........................... 170 mm × 46 mm × 28 mm  
(6-3/4 in. × 1-3/4 in. ×  
1-1/4 in.)  
Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W [2 W for 1 ch]  
allowable)  
Weight ................................ 2.3 kg (5.1 lbs)  
Hideaway unit:  
Preout max output level/output impedance  
..................................................... 1.7 V/1 kohm  
Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer):  
Low  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
..................................... 180 mm × 30 mm ×  
140 mm  
(5-7/8 in. × 1-1/8 in. ×  
3-7/8 in.)  
Weight ................................ 0.7 kg (1.5 lbs)  
Frequency ................ 40 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/160 Hz  
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB  
when boosted)  
Gain ............................ 12 dB  
Mid  
Navigation  
GPS Receiver:  
System ................................ L1, C/Acode GPS  
SPS (Standard Positioning  
Frequency ................ 200 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz/2 kHz  
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB  
when boosted)  
Service)  
Reception system .......... 8-channel multi-channel re-  
ception system  
Gain ............................ 12 dB  
High  
Frequency ................ 3.15 kHz/8 kHz/10 kHz/  
12.5 kHz  
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB  
when boosted)  
Reception frequency .... 1 575.42 MHz  
Sensitivity .......................... 130 dBm  
Position update frequency  
........................................... Approx. once per second  
Gain ............................ 12 dB  
Loudness contour:  
GPS antenna:  
Antenna ............................. Micro strip flat antenna/  
right-handed helical polari-  
sation  
Low ....................................... +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB  
(10 kHz)  
Mid ....................................... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB  
(10 kHz)  
High ..................................... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB  
(10 kHz)  
Antenna cable ................. 5.0 m (16 ft. 5 in.)  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
........................................... 33 mm × 13 mm × 36 mm  
(1-1/4 in. × 1/2 in. ×  
(volume: 30 dB)  
1-3/8 in.)  
186  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
HPF:  
AM tuner  
Frequency range ...................... 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
(10 kHz)  
Usable sensitivity ..................... 18 µV (S/N: 20 dB)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 65 dB (IHF-A network)  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/80 Hz/125 Hz  
Slope .................................... 12 dB/oct  
Subwoofer:  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/80 Hz/125 Hz  
Slope .................................... 18 dB/oct  
Gain ...................................... 12 dB  
Note  
Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse  
Specifications and design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice due to im-  
provements.  
DVD Drive  
System .......................................... DVD-Video, Compact disc  
audio, MP3, WMA, AAC,  
DivX system  
Usable discs .............................. DVD-Video, Compact disc,  
MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX  
Region number ........................ 1  
Signal format:  
Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz/48 kHz/96 kHz  
Number of quantization bits  
........................................... 16/20/24; linear  
Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,  
at sampling frequency  
96 kHz)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 97 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-  
work)  
(CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A  
network))  
Dynamic range ......................... 95 dB (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB  
(1 kHz))  
Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz)  
Output level:  
Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W ( 0.2 V)  
Audio ................................... 1.0 V (1 kHz, 0 dB)  
Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)  
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3  
WMA decoding format ......... Ver.9.0 L3  
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded  
by iTunes):  
.m4a  
DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver.3, Ver.4,  
Ver.5.2 :  
.avi, .divx  
FM tuner  
Frequency range ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 dBf (0.7 µV/75 W, mono,  
S/N: 30 dB)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 75 dB (IHF-A network)  
Distortion ..................................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
stereo)  
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
mono)  
Frequency response ............... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz ( 3 dB)  
Stereo separation .................... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)  
187  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU  
TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.  
TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium  
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936  
TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia  
TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada  
TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
TEL: 905-479-4411  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso  
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000  
TEL:55-9178-4270  
 
: 台北4413  
: (02) 2521-3588  
司  
9901-6  
: (0852) 2848-6488  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2008 by Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
Printed in China  
<KMZZX> <08J00000>  
<CRB2738-B/U> UC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Philips Bottle Warmer SCF643 12 User Manual
Philips Network Router SBCLI1000 User Manual
Pioneer Stereo System VSX 915 K User Manual
Planar Car Video System PT1710MX User Manual
Plasmon Computer Drive MOD 910 User Manual
Polar Heart Rate Monitor FS1 User Manual
Polaroid MP3 Player PMP283C 4 User Manual
Poulan Lawn Mower 179075 User Manual
Poulan Trimmer PL 200 User Manual
ProForm Treadmill PFTL790070 User Manual